Yamaha RX-V1400RDS Handleiding

Merk: Yamaha

Model: RX-V1400RDS

Categorie: AV-ontvangers

Type: Handleiding

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA

6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.

YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.

135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA

YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.

SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY

YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.

RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.

YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND

YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.

J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN

YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.

17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA

HTR-5790

AV Receiver

OWNER'S MANUAL

Printed in Malaysia WC85700

HTR-5790U-cv.fm Page 1 Tuesday, November 18, 2003 11:12 AM

• Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an

equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the

presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within

the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient

magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to

persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle

is intended to alert you to the presence of important

operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in

the literature accompanying the appliance.

1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions

should be read before the product is operated.

2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions

should be retained for future reference.

3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the

operating instructions should be adhered to.

4 Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions

should be followed.

5 Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before

cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use

a damp cloth for cleaning.

6 Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by

the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.

7 Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water –

for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or

laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;

and the like.

8 Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,

stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,

causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious

damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,

bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold

with the product. Any mounting of the product should

follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a

mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.

9 A product and cart combination should be moved with care.

Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven

surfaces may cause the product and cart

combination to overturn.

10 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided

for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the

product and to protect it from overheating, and these

openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings

should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,

sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not

be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack

unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s

instructions have been adhered to.

11 Power Sources – This product should be operated only from

the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If

you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,

consult your product dealer or local power company. For

products intended to operate from battery power, or other

sources, refer to the operating instructions.

12 Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped

with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having

one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the

power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you

are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try

reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact

your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not

defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.

13 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be

routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched

by items placed upon or against them, paying particular

attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the

point where they exit from the product.

14 Lightning – For added protection for this product during a

lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for

long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and

disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent

damage to the product due to lightning and power-line

surges.

15 Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be

located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other

electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such

power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna

system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching

such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be

fatal.

16 Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension

cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result

in a risk of fire or electric shock.

17 Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind

into this product through openings as they may touch

dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result

in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on

the product.

18 Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself

as opening or removing covers may expose you to

dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to

qualified service personnel.

19 Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the

wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel

under the following conditions:

a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,

b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the

product,

c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

CAUTION

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 2 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING

MAST

GROUND

CLAMP

ANTENNA

LEAD IN

WIRE

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

(NEC SECTION 810–20)

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

(NEC SECTION 810–21)

GROUND CLAMPS

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

ELECTRODE SYSTEM

(NEC ART 250. PART H)

ELECTRIC

SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

d) If the product does not operate normally by following

the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls

that are covered by the operating instructions as an

improper adjustment of other controls may result in

damage and will often require extensive work by a

qualified technician to restore the product to its normal

operation,

e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any

way, and

f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in perfor-

mance - this indicates a need for service.

20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,

be sure the service technician has used replacement parts

specified by the manufacturer or have the same

characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized

substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other

hazards.

21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to

this product, ask the service technician to perform safety

checks to determine that the product is in proper operating

condition.

22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted

to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the

manufacturer.

23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat

sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other

products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or

cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna

or cable system is grounded so as to provide some

protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.

Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70,

provides information with regard to proper grounding of the

mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire

to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,

location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding

electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s

attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides

guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies

that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding

system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as

practical.

FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)

1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS

UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the

instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC

requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by

Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to

use the product.

2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to

accessories and/or another product use only high quality

shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST

be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to

follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to

use this product in the USA.

3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply

with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15

for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these

requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that

your use of this product in a residential environment will

not result in harmful interference with other electronic

devices.

This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if

not installed and used according to the instructions found

in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the

operation of other electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that

interference will not occur in all installations. If this

product is found to be the source of interference, which

can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,

please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the

following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being

affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit

breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient

the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,

change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory

results, please contact the local retailer authorized to

distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the

appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics

Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA

90620.

The above statements apply ONLY to those products

distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its

subsidiaries.

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 3 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

1 To assure the finest performance, please read this

manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future

reference.

2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool,

dry, clean place — away from direct sunlight, heat

sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold.

Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top,

20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of

this unit.

3 Locate this unit away from other electrical

appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid

humming sounds.

4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature

changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit

in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with

a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this

unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire,

damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may

fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to

liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit,

do not place:

– Other components, as they may cause damage

and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit.

– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause

fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall

and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user

and/or damage to this unit.

6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth,

curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If

the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause

fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.

7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all

connections are complete.

8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may

overheat, possibly causing damage.

9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.

10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall

outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.

11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this

might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.

12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used.

Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified

is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this

unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be

held responsible for any damage resulting from use

of this unit with a voltage other than specified.

13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the

power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical

storm.

14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact

qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any

service is needed. The cabinet should never be

opened for any reasons.

15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods

of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug

from the wall outlet.

16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section

on common operating errors before concluding that

this unit is faulty.

17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set

this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the

AC power plug from the wall outlet.

18 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models

only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this

unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE

plugging into the AC main supply.

Voltages are 110/120/220/230-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.

We Want You Listening For A Lifetime

YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association's Consumer

Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your

equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound

come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or

distortion - and, most importantly, without affecting your

sensitive hearing.

Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often

undetectable until it is too late, YA M A H A and the

Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer

Electronics Group recommend you to avoid

prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.

CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC

SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN

OR MOISTURE.

This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as

long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself

is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this

state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of

power.

FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS

To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to

wide slot and fully insert.

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian

ICES-003.

IMPORTANT

Please record the serial number of this unit in the space

below.

MODEL:

Serial No.:

The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.

Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future

reference.

iii

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 4 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION

BASIC

OPERATION

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION

CONTENTS ............................................................ 1

FEATURES............................................................. 2

GETTING STARTED............................................ 3

Supplied accessories .................................................. 3

Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4

Front panel ................................................................. 4

Remote control........................................................... 6

Using the remote control ........................................... 7

Front panel display .................................................... 8

Rear panel ................................................................ 10

SPEAKER SETUP ............................................... 11

Speaker placement ................................................... 11

Speaker connections ................................................ 12

CONNECTIONS .................................................. 15

Before connecting components................................ 15

Connecting video components................................. 16

Connecting audio components................................. 19

Connecting the antennas.......................................... 21

Connecting the power supply cord .......................... 22

Speaker impedance setting ...................................... 23

Turning on the power............................................... 23

AUTO SETUP....................................................... 24

Introduction.............................................................. 24

Optimizer microphone setup.................................... 24

Starting the setup ..................................................... 25

BASIC SETUP...................................................... 28

Using BASIC setup.................................................. 28

PLAYBACK.......................................................... 30

Basic operations....................................................... 30

Selecting sound field programs ............................... 32

Selecting input modes.............................................. 34

TUNING ................................................................ 36

Automatic and manual tuning.................................. 36

Presetting stations .................................................... 37

Selecting preset stations........................................... 39

Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 39

RECORDING ....................................................... 40

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM

DESCRIPTIONS...............................................41

For movie/video sources.......................................... 41

For music sources .................................................... 43

ADVANCED OPERATIONS ..............................44

Selecting the OSD mode.......................................... 44

Using the sleep timer ............................................... 44

Manually adjusting speaker levels........................... 45

Using the test tone ................................................... 46

SET MENU ............................................................47

Using SET MENU................................................... 48

Manual setup: SOUND............................................ 49

Manual setup: INPUT.............................................. 54

Manual setup: OPTION........................................... 56

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................59

Control area ............................................................. 59

Setting manufacturer codes...................................... 60

Programming codes from other remote controls ..... 61

Changing source names in the display window....... 62

Clearing function sets .............................................. 63

Clearing individual functions .................................. 63

Controlling each component.................................... 64

ZONE 2/ZONE 3

(U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only)..68

Zone 2/Zone 3 connections...................................... 68

Remote controlling Zone 2/Zone 3.......................... 69

EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS ......71

What is a sound field ............................................... 71

Changing parameter settings ................................... 71

SOUND FIELD PARAMETER

DESCRIPTIONS...............................................73

TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................77

GLOSSARY...........................................................82

SPECIFICATIONS...............................................85

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION

PREPARATION

BASIC OPERATION

SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS

ADVANCED OPERATION

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 1 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

FEATURES

Built-in 7-channel power amplifier

◆ Minimum RMS output power

(0.04% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8Ω)

Front: 110 W + 110 W

Center: 110 W

Surround: 110 W + 110 W

Surround Back: 110 W + 110 W

Sound field features

◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of

sound fields

◆ THX

◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder

◆ DTS/DTS ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS

Neo:6 decoder, DTS 96/24

◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic

IIx Decoder

◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP

◆ SILENT CINEMA

™

Sophisticated AM/FM tuner

◆ 40-station random access preset tuning

◆ Automatic preset tuning

◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)

Other features

◆ YPAO: YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic

Optimizer for automatic speaker setup

◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter

◆ “SET MENU” which provides you with items for

optimizing this unit for your audio/video system

◆ 6 or 8-channel external decoder input for other future

formats

◆ On Screen Display function helpful in controlling this

unit

◆ S Video signal input/output capability

◆ Component video input/output capability

◆ Video signal conversion (composite video ↔

S Video → component video) capability for monitor

out

◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks

◆ Sleep timer

◆ Night listening mode

◆ Remote control with preset manufacturer codes

◆ Zone 2/Zone 3 custom installation facility (U.S.A.,

Canada and Australia models only)

• y indicates a tip for your operation.

• Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button

names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses.

• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In

case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

SILENT CINEMA is a trademark of YAMAHA

CORPORATION.

“DTS” and “DTS-ES Digital Surround” and “Neo:6” are

trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

THX and the THX logo are registered trademarks of THX Ltd.

Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and

Dolby Laboratories, Inc. and is a trademark of Dolby

FEATURES

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 2 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

GETTING STARTED

INTRODUCTION

Please check that you received all of the following parts.

1 Press the part and slide the battery

compartment cover off.

2 Insert four supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM-

4) according to the polarity markings on the

inside of the battery compartment.

3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.

Notes on batteries

• Change all of the batteries if you notice the condition like; the

operation range of the remote control decreases, the indicator

does not flash or its light becomes dim.

• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.

• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and

manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as

these different types of batteries may have the same shape and

color.

• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately.

Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into

contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment

thoroughly before installing new batteries.

GETTING STARTED

Supplied accessories

PHONO

POWER SLEEP

CLEAR

LEARN

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

RE–NAME

INPUT MODE

SYSTEM

AUX

DTV

POWER

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

AUDI O

VOL

LEVEL

STRAIGHT

STEREO

ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR

NIGHT

EX/ES

MOVIE

THX /DTS

TEST

ON SCREEN

EFFECT

CHP/INDEX

TV VOL

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

HALL

CHCH

JAZZ

ROCK

TITLE

MUTE

POWER

AMP

AVTV

DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

SELECT

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

–

3421

+10 ENTER

67 8

Remote control

Batteries (4)

(AAA, R03, UM-4)

Indoor FM antenna

(U.S.A., Canada, China,

Korea, Asia and General

models)

AM loop antenna

Optimizer microphone*

75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter

(U.K. model only)

Speaker terminal wrench

Power Cord

(U.S.A., Canada and Europe models)

(U.K., Europe and

Australia models)

The optimizer microphone is

sensitive to heat.

– Keep it away from direct

sunlight.

– Do not place it on top of this unit.

Installing batteries in the remote

control

If the remote control is without batteries for more than

3 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the

remote control, the contents of the memory may be

cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new

batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program

any acquired functions that may have been cleared.

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 3 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

1 STANDBY/ON

Turns on this unit or sets it to the standby mode. When

you turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will

be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce

sound.

In standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in

order to receive infrared-signals from the remote control.

2 Remote control sensor

Receives signals from the remote control.

3 Front panel display

Shows information about the operational status of this

unit.

4 PRESET/TUNING EDIT

Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h

between selecting preset station numbers and tuning.

5 FM/AM

Switches the reception band between FM and AM.

6 A/B/C/D/E

Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E).

7 PRESET/TUNING l / h

Selects preset station number 1 to 8 when the colon (:) is

displayed next to the band indication in the front panel

display.

Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) is not

displayed.

8 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

Stores a station in the memory. Hold down this button for

more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning.

9 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

Switches the tuning mode between automatic (“AUTO”

indicator on) and manual (“AUTO” indicator off).

0 VOLUME

Controls the output level of all audio channels.

This does not affect the REC OUT level.

A OPTIMIZER MIC jack

Use to connect and input audio signals from the supplied

microphone for use with the AUTO SETUP function (see

page 24).

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

Front panel

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/TUNING

INPUT MODE

TONE CONTROL

MULTI CH

INPUT

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

VOLUME

PROGRAM INPUT

STANDBY

/ON

OPTIMIZER

MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

SPEAKERS

A B

OPTICALRAUDI OL

VIDEO

S VIDEO

VIDEO AUX

(U.S.A. model)

Note

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 4 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

INTRODUCTION

B PHONES (SILENT CINEMA)

Outputs audio signals for private listening with

headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals

are output to the OUTPUT jacks or to the speakers.

All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down

to the left and right headphone channels.

C SPEAKERS A/B

Turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A

and/or B terminals on the rear panel at each time the

corresponding button is pressed.

D STRAIGHT/EFFECT

Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is

selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are

output directly from their respective speakers without

effect processing.

E PROGRAM

Use to select sound field programs or adjust bass/treble

balance (in conjunction with TONE CONTROL).

F TONE CONTROL

Use to adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left/right

and center channels (see page 31).

G INPUT MODE

Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of

signals received when one component is connected to two

or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 34). Priority

cannot be set when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the

input source.

H INPUT selector

Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch.

I MULTI CH INPUT

Selects the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT

jacks. When selected, the MULTI CH INPUT source

takes priority over the source selected with INPUT (or the

input selector buttons on the remote control).

J VIDEO AUX jacks

Input audio and video signals from a portable external

source such as a game console. To reproduce source

signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input

source.

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 5 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

This section describes the function of each control on the

remote control. See “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES”

on page 59 to operate other components with this remote

control.

1 Infrared window

Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the

component you want to operate.

2 TRANSMIT indicator

Flashes while the remote control is sending signals.

3 STANDBY

Sets this unit in the standby mode.

4 SYSTEM POWER

Turns on the power of this unit.

5 Input selector buttons

Select the input source and change the control area.

6 Display window

Shows the name of the selected source component that

you can control.

7 LEVEL

Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the

level.

8 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i

Use to select and adjust DSP program parameters or SET

MENU items.

9 TEST

Outputs the test tone to adjust the speaker levels.

0 Sound field program/Numeric buttons

Use to select sound field programs or input numbers.

A RE-NAME

Used for changing the input source name in the display

window (see page 62).

B CLEAR

Used for clearing functions acquired when using the learn

and rename features, or setting manufacturer codes (see

page 63).

C LEARN

Used for setting up the manufacturer code or for

programming functions from other remote controls (see

pages 60 and 61).

D SLEEP

Sets the sleep timer.

E INPUT MODE

Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of

signals received when one component is connected to two

or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 34). Priority

cannot be set when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the

input source.

F MULTI CH IN

Selects the MULTI CH INPUT mode when using an

external decoder (etc.).

G SELECT k/n

Selects another component that you can control

independently of the input component selected with the

input selector buttons.

H AMP

Selects AMP or other component selected by the input

selector button.

Remote control

PHONO

POWER SLEEP

CLEAR

LEARN

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

RE–NAME

INPUT MODE

SYSTEM

AUX

DTV

POWER

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOL

LEVEL

STRAIGHT

STEREO

ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR

NIGHT

EX/ES

MOVIE

THX /DTS

TEST

ON SCREEN

EFFECT

CHP/INDEX

TV VOL

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

HALL

CHCH

JAZZ

ROCK

TITLE

MUTE

POWER

AMP

AVTV

DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

SELECT

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

–

3421

+10 ENTER

67 8

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 6 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

INTRODUCTION

I VOL –/+

Increases or decreases the volume level.

J MUTE

Mutes the sound. The MUTE indicator turns on when the

MUTE function is on. Press again to restore the audio

output to the previous volume level.

K SET MENU

Selects the SET MENU mode.

L ON SCREEN

Selects the on-screen display (OSD) mode for your video

monitor.

M STRAIGHT/EFFECT

Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is

selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are

output directly from their respective speakers without

effect processing.

N EX/ES

Switches between 5.1 or 6.1/7.1 channel playback of

multi-channel software.

The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam.

Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote

control sensor on the main unit during operation.

■ Handling the remote control

• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote

control.

• Do not drop the remote control.

• Do not leave or store the remote control in the

following types of conditions:

– high humidity such as near a bath

– high temperature such as near a heater or stove

– extremely low temperature

– dusty places

Using the remote control

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/TUNING

INPUT MODE

TONE CONTROL

MULTI CH

INPUT

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

VOLUME

PROGRAM INPUT

STANDBY

/ON

OPTIMIZER

MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

SPEAKERS

A B

OPTICALRAUDIOL

VIDEO

S VIDEO

VIDEO AUX

30 30

TRANSMIT

RE–NAME

CLEAR

LEARN

POWER SLEEP

STANDBY

INPUT MODE

SYSTEM

PHONO TUNER CD

MULTI CH IN

AUX

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

SELECT

POWER

AMP

REC

DISC SKIP

AUDIO

VOL

LEVEL

TITLE

TV INPUT

TV VOL

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

MUTE

TV MUTE

SELECT

PRESET PRESET

TEST

RETURN

TV VOL

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

STEREO

HALL

JAZZ

ROCK

ENTERTAIN

MUSIC

TV THTR

MOVIE

ENTER

+10

EX/ES

THX /DTS

NIGHT

CHP/INDEX

Approximately 6 m (20 ft)

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 7 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

1 Decoder indicators

When any of this unit’s decoders function, the respective

indicator lights up.

2 Sound field indicators

Light to indicate the active DSP sound fields.

3 Input source indicators

A cursor lights to show the current input source.

4 CINEMA DSP indicator

Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field

program.

5 OPTIMIZER indicator

Lights up during the auto setup procedure and when the

auto setup speaker settings are used without any

modifications.

6 STEREO indicator

Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an

FM stereo broadcast while the “AUTO” indicator is lit.

7 AUTO indicator

Shows that this unit is in the automatic tuning mode.

8 MUTE indicator

Lights up while the MUTE function is on.

9 VOLUME level indicators

Indicate the volume level.

0 THX indicator

Lights up when a THX program is selected.

A PCM indicator

Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code

modulation) digital audio signals.

B Headphones indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected.

C SP A B indicators

Light up according to the set of front speakers selected.

Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are

selected, or when bi-wiring.

D SILENT CINEMA indicator

Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound

field program is selected (see page 31).

E NIGHT indicator

Lights up when you select night listening mode.

F VIRTUAL indicator

Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see

page 34).

G SLEEP indicator

Lights up while the sleep timer is on.

H Multi-information display

Shows the current sound field program name and other

information when adjusting or changing settings.

I HiFi DSP

Lights when you select a HiFi DSP sound field program.

Front panel display

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

VIRTUAL

ZONE2

ZONE3

OPTIMIZER

HiFi DSP

PS PTY

RT CT

EON

PTY

HOLD

STEREO

TUNED

AUTO

MEMORY

MUTE

VOLUME

SLEEP

DIGITAL

MATRIX

DISCRETE

PCMTHX

NIGHT

SILENT

A B

LFE

96/24

LL C R

SL SB SR

(U.S.A., Canada and

Australia models only)

(U.K. and Europe models only)

Presence DSP sound field

Listening position

Left surround

DSP sound field

Right surround

DSP sound field

Surround back DSP sound field

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 8 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

INTRODUCTION

J TUNED indicator

Lights up when this unit is tuned in to a station.

K MEMORY indicator

Flashes to show a station can be stored.

L 96/24 indicator

Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.

M LFE indicator

Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal.

N Input channel indicators

Indicate the channel components of current digital input

signal.

O Presence and surround back speaker

indicators

Indicate the connection of presence and/or surround back

speakers when using the SPEAKERS setting (page 29) or

SP LEVEL setting (page 50).

P ZONE 2/ZONE 3 indicators

(U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only)

Light up while Zone 2 or Zone 3 signal is output.

Q RDS indicators

(U.K. and Europe models only)

The name(s) of the RDS data offered by the currently

received RDS station light(s) up.

EON lights up when an RDS station that offers the EON

data service is being received.

PTY HOLD lights up while searching for stations in the

PTY SEEK mode.

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 9 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS

1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks

See page 19 for details.

2 Audio component jacks

See page 19 for connection information.

3 Video component jacks

See pages 16 and 18 for connection information.

4 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks

(U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only)

See page 69 for details.

5 CONTROL OUT jack

(U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only)

This is control expansion terminal for commercial use.

6 AC OUTLET(S)

Use to supply power to your other A/V components (see

page 22).

7 AC INLET (U.S.A. and Canada models only)

Use this inlet to plug in the supplied power cable (see

page 22).

8 DIGITAL INPUT jacks

See pages 16, 18 and 19 for details.

9 MULTI CH INPUT jacks

See page 17 for connection information.

0 ZONE 2 / ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks

(U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only)

See page 68 for details.

A Antenna terminals

See page 21 for connection information.

B PRE OUT jacks

See page 20 for connection information.

C Speaker terminals

See page 12 for connection information.

D PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals

(U.S.A., Canada and Australia models)

PRESENCE speaker terminals

(other models)

See page 12 for connection information.

< Asia and General models only >

FREQUENCY STEP switch

See page 21.

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

See page 22.

Rear panel

AC OUTLETS

GND

SPEAKERS

FRONT

SURROUND

FRONT

CENTER

PRE OUT

SUB

WOOFER

SURROUND BACK

/PRESENCE

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

MONITOR OUT

MULTI CH INPUT OUTPUT

AUDIO AUDIO VIDEO

S VIDEO

DVD

DTV

CBL

/SAT

VIDEO

(

PLAY

)

(

PLAY

)

OUT

(

REC

)

OUT

(

REC

)

CD-R

MD/TAPE

PHONO

OUT

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

DVR/

VCR 2

VCR 1

CD-R

FRONT (6CH)/SB (8CH)

SURROUND

TUNER

ANT

GND

FM ANT

75Ω

UNBAL.

COMPONENT VIDEO

DVD

MONITOR OUT

DTV

DIGITAL OUTPUT

DIGITAL INPUT

OPTICAL

TAP E

CD-R

DVD

DTV

CBL/SAT

DVD

DVR/

VCR 2

COAXIAL

–

––

–

PRESENCE/ ZONE 2

CONTROL OUTREMOTE

IN OUT

+12V 15mA MAX.

SINGLE

(U.S.A. model)

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 10 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

SPEAKER SETUP

PREPARATION

The speaker layout above shows the standard ITU-R speaker

setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP, multi-channel

audio sources and THX.

Front speakers (FR and FL)

The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus

effect sounds. Place these speakers an equal distance from

the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker

from each side of the video monitor should be the same.

Center speaker (C)

The center speaker is for the center channel sounds

(dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical

to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results,

however, are obtained with the full system. Align the front

face of the center speaker with the front face of your video

monitor. Place the speaker centrally between the front

speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as

directly over or under it.

Surround speakers (SR and SL)

The surround speakers are used for effect and surround

sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening

position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above

the floor.

Surround back speakers (SBR and SBL)

The surround back speakers supplement the surround

speakers and provide for more realistic front-to-back

transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the

listening position and at the same height as the surround

speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm (12 in)

apart. Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width

as the front speakers.

Subwoofer

The use of a subwoofer, such as the YAMAHA Active

Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only

for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels,

but also for high fidelity reproduction of the LFE (low-

frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and

DTS software. The position of the subwoofer is not so

critical, because low bass sounds are not highly

directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the

front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the

room to reduce wall reflections.

Presence speakers (PR and PL)

Presence speakers supplement the sound from the front

speakers with extra ambient effects produced by

CINEMA DSP (see page 41). These effects include

sounds that filmmakers intend to locate a little farther

back behind the screen in order to create more theater-like

ambience. Place these speakers at the front of the room

about 0.5 - 1 m (1 - 3 ft) outside the front speakers, facing

slightly inwards, and about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor.

■ Di-pole speaker layout

Either di-pole or direct radiating speaker types can be used

for THX surround. If you choose di-pole speakers, please

place the surround and surround back speakers according

to the speaker layout below.

SPEAKER SETUP

Speaker placement

60˚

30˚

SBR

SBL

80˚

more than 30 cm

(12 inches)

1.8 m (6 ft)

SBR

SBL

30˚ 30˚

: Di-pole speaker

: Direction of di-pole speaker

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 11 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

SPEAKER SETUP

Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R),

“+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are

faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the

polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound

will be unnatural and lack bass.

• If you will use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set this unit’s

speaker impedance setting to 6 ohms before using (see

page 23).

• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that the

power of this unit is off.

• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or

do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This

could damage this unit and/or speakers.

• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of

speakers still creates the interference with the monitor,

place the speakers away from the monitor.

A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables

running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped

differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges.

Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red)

terminals on this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain

cable to the “–” (black) terminals.

1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8") of

insulation from the end of each speaker

cables.

2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together

to prevent short circuits.

3 Unscrew the knob.

Supplied speaker terminal wrench is useful to screw or

unscrew knobs.

4 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side

of each terminal.

5 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.

Connecting to PRESENCE/ZONE 2 or PRESENCE

speaker terminals

1 Open the tab.

2 Insert one bare wire into

the hole of each terminal.

3 Return the tab to secure

the wire.

Banana plug connections

(With the exception of U.K., Europe and Asia models)

First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug

connector into the end of the corresponding terminal.

Speaker connections

CAUTION

10 mm (3/8")

Red: positive (+)

Black: negative (–)

Banana plug

(With the exception of U.K., Europe

and Asia models)

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 12 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

SPEAKER SETUP

PREPARATION

AC OUTLETS

SPEAKERS

FRONT

CENTER

PRE OUT

SUB

WOOFER

SURROUND

SURROUND BACK

–

––

–

SINGLE

231

7 8 6

PRESENCE/ ZONE 2

Subwoofer

system

Center

speaker

Front speakers (A)

Surround back speakers

LeftRight

LeftRight LeftRight

Surround speakers

Front

speakers

(B)

Speaker layout

(U.S.A. model)

LeftRight

You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, but they do not output sound simultaneously.

• The surround back speakers output the surround back channel included in Dolby Digital EX and DTS ES software and only

operate when the Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES decoder is turned on.

• The presence speakers output ambient effects created by the DSP sound fields. They do not output sound when other sound fields

are selected.

Presence speakers

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 13 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

SPEAKER SETUP

■ FRONT terminals

Connect one or two speaker systems to these terminals. If

you use only one speaker system, connect it to either the

FRONT A or B terminals.

The Canada model cannot output to two separate speaker systems

simultaneously.

Bi-wired connection

The unit also allows you to make bi-wired connections to

one speaker system. Use two pairs of speaker cables fo

each speaker (one pair for the woofer and one pair for the tweeter/

mid-range). To use the bi-wired connections, press

SPEAKERS

A and SPEAKERS B on the front panel so that both SP A and

B light up on the front panel display.

■ CENTER terminals

Connect a center speaker to these terminals.

■ SURROUND terminals

Connect surround speakers to these terminals.

■ SUBWOOFER jack

Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the

YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,

to this jack.

■ SURROUND BACK terminals

Connect surround back speakers to these terminals. If you

only connect one surround back speaker, connect it to the

left (L) terminals.

■ PRESENCE terminals

Connect presence speakers to these terminals.

If you are using either U.S.A., Canada or Australia model, you

can also use these speakers as Zone 2 speakers (see page 57).

Note

Bi-wired connection

FRONT

–

This unit

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 14 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains

power until all connections between components are

complete.

■ Signal directions and cable indications

■ Analog jacks

You can input analog signals from audio components by

connecting audio pin cable to the analog jacks on this unit.

Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the

left jacks.

■ Digital jacks

This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital

signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You

can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and

DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both

the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to

the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital

input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital

signals.

This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus

audio signals input to the analog jacks are only output to the

analog OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise audio signals input to the

digital (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are only output to the

DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks.

Dust protection cap

Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect

the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are

not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in

place. This cap protects the jack from dust.

■ Video jacks

This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection

depends on the availability of input jacks on your monitor.

The signals input through the VIDEO jack on this unit can

be output through the S VIDEO and COMPONENT

VIDEO jacks (see page 56). The signals input through the

S VIDEO jack can be output through the VIDEO jack

when V CONV. is set to ON (see page 56).

VIDEO jack

For conventional composite video signals.

S VIDEO jack

For S-video signals, separated into luminance (Y) and

color (C) video signals to achieve high-quality color

reproduction.

COMPONENT VIDEO jacks

For component signals, separated into luminance (Y) and

color difference (P

B, PR) to provide the best quality in

picture reproduction.

When signals are input through both the S VIDEO and VIDEO

jacks, signals input through the S VIDEO jack have priority.

CONNECTIONS

Before connecting components

Note

CAUTION

video signal direction

left analog cables

right analog cables

optical cables

coaxial cables

video cables

S-video cables

For analog signals

For digital signals

For video signals

audio signal direction

Note

VIDEO

S VIDEO

COMPONENT VIDEO

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 15 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

CONNECTIONS

■ Connections for DVD playback

Connecting video components

GND

SUR

SUB

WOO

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

MONITOR OUT

MULCH CH INPUT OUTPUT

AUDIO AUDIO VIDEO

S VIDEO

DVD

DTV

CBL

/SAT

VIDEO

(

PLAY

)

(

PLAY

)

OUT

(

REC

)

OUT

(

REC

)

CD-R

MD/TAPE

PHONO

OUT

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

DVR/

VCR 2

VCR 1

CD-R

MAIN/SURROUND BACK

SURROUND

TUNER

75Ω

UNBAL.

ANT

GND

FM ANT

COMPONENT VIDEO

DVD

MONITOR OUT

DTV

DIGITAL OUTPUT

DIGITAL INPUT

OPTICAL

TAPE

CD-R

DVD

CBL/SAT

DVD

DTV

COAXIAL

DVD player

Video

monitor

(U.S.A. model)

Optical out Video out

Audio out

Video in

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 16 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

■ Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks

This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and

SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-disc player, external decoder, sound processor or pre-

amplifier.

If you set EXT.INPUT 6ch/8ch to “8ch” (see page 55), you can use input jacks assigned in EXT.INPUT FRONT

(page 55) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8 channels.

Connect the output jacks on your multi-disc player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match

the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.

• When you select MULTI CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you

cannot select sound field programs.

• This unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that

you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature.

• When headphones are used, only front L/R channels are output.

Notes

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

MULTI CH INPUT

AUDIO AUDIO

DVD

DTV

CBL

/SAT

(

PLAY

)

(

PLAY

)

CD-R

MD/TAPE

DVR/

VCR 2

VCR 1

FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH)

SURROUND

LRLR

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

MULTI CH INPUT

FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH)

SURROUND

LRLR

Multi-disc player/

External decoder

Multi-disc player/

External decoder

For 6-channel input For 8-channel input

Front

out

Surround

out

Subwoofer

out

Center

out

Front out

Surround

out

Subwoofer

out

Center

out

Surround

back out

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 17 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

CONNECTIONS

■ Connections for other video components

■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)

GND

SURR

SUB

WOO

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

MONITOR OUT

MULCH CH INPUT OUTPUT

AUDIO AUDIO VIDEO

S VIDEO

DVD

DTV

CBL

/SAT

VIDEO

(

PLAY

)

(

PLAY

)

OUT

(

REC

)

OUT

(

REC

)

CD-R

MD/TAPE

PHONO

OUT

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

DVR/

VCR 2

VCR 1

CD-R

MAIN/SURROUND BACK

SURROUND

TUNER

75Ω

UNBAL.

ANT

GND

FM ANT

COMPONENT VIDEO

DVD

MONITOR OUT

DTV

DIGITAL OUTPUT

DIGITAL INPUT

OPTICAL

TAPE

CD-R

DVD

CBL/SAT

DVD

DVR/

VCR2

COAXIAL

Cable TV or

satellite tuner

(U.S.A. model)

DVD recorder

or VCR

Audio out

Video out

Optical out

Audio out Video out

Video in

Audio in

Connect a YAMAHA

CD recorder that

outputs OSD signals.

Coaxial out

S VIDEO VIDEO

L AUDIO R OPTICAL

VIDEO AUX

Game

console or

video camera

Video out

S video out

Audio out L

Audio out R

Optical out

Use these jacks to connect any video

source, such as a game console or

camcorder, to this unit.

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 18 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

■ Connections for audio components

■ Connecting a turntable

PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM

or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with

a low-output MC cartridge, use an in-line boosting

transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to

these jacks.

Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in

the signal. However you may hear less noise without the

connection to the GND terminal for some record players.

Connecting audio components

GND

CENTER

SUB

WOOFER

MULCH CH INPUT OUTPUT

AUDIO AUDIO

(

PLAY

)

(

PLAY

)

OUT

(

REC

)

OUT

(

REC

)

CD-R

MD/TAPE

PHONO

ZONE 2

ZONE 3

DIGITAL OUTPUT

DIGITAL INPUT

OPTICAL

TAPE

CD-R

DVD

CBL/SAT

DVD

DTV

COAXIAL

SURROUND

MAIN/SURROUND BACK

CD player

MD recorder or

tape deck

(U.S.A. model)

CD recorder*

Turntable

Optical out

Coaxial out

Audio out

Audio inAudio out

Optical in

Audio in

Audio out

GND

*Some CD recorders can be

connected to the VIDEO

CD-R jacks (see page 18).

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 19 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

CONNECTIONS

■ Connecting to an external amplifier

If you want to increase the power output to the speakers,

or want to use another amplifier, connect an external

amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks as follows.

• When audio pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT jacks for

output to an external amplifier, it is not necessary to use the

corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Set the volume of the

amplifier connected to this unit to the maximum.

• The signal output through the FRONT PRE OUT and CENTER

PRE OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings.

• Signals will only be output from the FRONT PRE OUT jacks

when SPEAKER A is turned off with ZONE B selected for SP

B SET (see page 57).

1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks

Front channel line output jacks.

2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks

Surround channel line output jacks.

3 CENTER PRE OUT jack

Center channel line output jack.

4 SURROUND BACK / PRESENCE PRE OUT

jacks

Surround back or presence channel line output jacks.

5 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack

Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the

YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,

to this jack.

• Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signal as the

corresponding speaker terminals. However, when both surround

back and presence speakers are connected to this unit, the

channel of the signals output from SURROUND BACK /

PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks may not correspond to the

location of the speakers connected through SURROUND

BACK / PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks.

• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on

the subwoofer. It is also possible to adjust the volume level by

using the remote control of this unit (see “Manually adjusting

speaker levels” on page 45).

• Some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER jack

depending on the SPEAKER SET (see page 49) and LFE

LEVEL (see page 51) settings.

Notes

FRONT

SURROUND

PRE OUT

SUB

WOOFER

SURROUND BACK

/PRESENCE

CENTER

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 20 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this

unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient

signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the

designated terminals.

■ Connecting the AM loop antenna

1 Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it

to the terminals on this unit.

2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop

antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND

terminals.

3 Orient the AM loop antenna for the best

reception.

• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.

• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an

outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.

• A property installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception

than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an

outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest

authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor

antennas.

■ 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter

(U.K. model only)

1 Open the cover of the

included 75-ohm/300-ohm

antenna adapter.

2 Cut the external sleeve

of the 75-ohm coaxial

cable and prepare it for

connection.

3 Cut the lead wire and

remove it.

4 Insert the cable

wire into the slot,

and clamp it with

pliers.

5 Snap the cover

into place.

■ FREQUENCY STEP switch

(Asia and General models only)

Because the interstation frequency

spacing differs in different areas, set

the FREQUENCY STEP switch

(locating on the rear panel) according

to the frequency spacing in your area.

• North, Central and South America: 100 kHz/10 kHz

• Other areas: 50 kHz/9 kHz

Before setting this switch, disconnect this unit’s AC

power cord from the wall outlet.

Connecting the antennas

MAI

SURR

SUB

WOOF

TUNER

ANT

GND

FM ANT

75Ω

UNBAL.

COMPONENT VIDEO

NITOR OUT

AM loop antenna

(included)

Ground (GND terminal)

For maximum safety and minimum interference,

connect the antenna

GND terminal to a good earth

ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven

into moist earth.

Indoor FM antenna

(included)

Notes

11 (7/16)

8 (5/16)

6 (1/14)

Unit:

mm (inch)

Lead wire

Clamp

nsert the wire

nto slot.

100kHz/10kHz

FREQUENCY

STEP

50kHz/9kHz

FM AM

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 21 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

CONNECTIONS

■ Connecting the AC power cord

(U.S.A. and Canada models)

Plug the power cord into the AC inlet after all other

connections are complete, then plug the power cord to an

AC wall outlet.

Do not use other AC power cords. Use the one provided.

Use of other power cords may result in fire hazard or

electrical shock.

(Other models)

Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet.

■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)

U.K. and Australia models.............................. 1 OUTLET

Korea model............................................................... None

Other models.................................................. 2 OUTLETS

Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your

other components to this unit. Power to the AC

OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON

(or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). These outlets

will supply power to any connected component whenever

this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power

consumption of components) that can be connected to the

AC OUTLET(S) is:

Asia and General models .......................................... 50 W

Korea model................................................................. N/A

Other models ........................................................... 100 W

■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(Asia and General models only)

The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit

must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging

into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/230-

240 V AC, 50/60 Hz.

■ Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from

being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.

However if the power cord is disconnected from the AC

wall outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one

week, the stored data will be lost.

Connecting the power supply cord

AC OUTLETS

(U.S.A. model)

VOLTAGE SELECTOR

(Asia and General models)

CAUTION

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 22 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

CONNECTIONS

PREPARATION

If you are using 6 ohm speakers, set the impedance to 6

ohms as follows before turning on the power.

Be sure this unit is in the standby mode.

1 On the front panel, while pressing down

SPEAKERS A, press STANDBY/ON.

“SP IMP.SET” appears on the front panel display for

a few seconds, then “Minimum 8ohms” appears.

2 Press SPEAKERS A or SPEAKERS B to

select the impedance of your speakers.

You can select either 6 ohms or 8 ohms.

3 Press STANDBY/ON to exit the setting.

This unit will be set to the standby mode.

You can also use SP IMP.SET (see page 57) to set the speaker

impedance.

When all connections are complete, turn on the power of

this unit.

1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on

the remote control) to turn on the power of

this unit.

2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

Speaker impedance setting

CAUTION

SPEAKER

STANDBY

/ON

SP IMP.SET

Minimum 8ohms

Turning on the power

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/TUNING

INPUT MODE

TONE CONTROL

MULTI CH

INPUT

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

VOLUME

PROGRAM INPUT

STANDBY

/ON

OPTIMIZER

MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

SPEAKERS

A B

OPTICALRAUDIOL

VIDEO

S VIDEO

VIDEO AUX

PHONO

POWER SLEEP

CLEAR

LEARN

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

RE–NAME

INPUT MODE

SYSTEM

AUX

DTV

POWER

REC

POWER

AMP

AVTV

DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

SELECT

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER

MULTI CH IN

(U.S.A. model)

STANDBY

/ON

POWER

SYSTEM

Front panel

Remote control

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 23 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

AUTO SETUP

This receiver employs YAMAHA Parametric Room

Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology which lets you

avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and

achieves highly accurate sound adjustments. The supplied

optimizer microphone collects and analyzes the sound

your speakers produce in your actual listening

environment.

The basic setup feature (page 28) is useful if you want to set up

your system quickly and with minimal effort. However, we

recommend that you come back and perform auto setup later to

take advantage of YPAO and enjoy even higher fidelity.

• Loud test tones are output during the auto setup procedure.

Please be ready!

• If auto setup stops and error messages appear on the OSD,

follow the troubleshooting on page 27.

YPAO performs the following checks and makes

appropriate adjustments to give you the best possible

sound from your system.

WIRING

Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of

each speaker.

DISTANCE

Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening

position and adjusts the timing of each channel.

SIZE

Checks the speaker’s frequency response and sets the

appropriate low frequency crossover for each channel.

EQUALIZING

Adjusts frequency and levels of each channel’s parametric

equalizer to reduce coloration across the channels and

create a cohesive sound field. This is particularly

important if you use different brands or sizes of speakers

for some channels or have a room with unique sonic

characteristics.

YPAO equalizing calibration incorporates three

parameters (frequency, level and Q factor) for each of the

seven bands in its parametric equalizer to provide highly

precise automatic adjustment of frequency characteristics.

LEVEL

Checks and adjusts the sound level (volume) of each

speaker.

1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone

to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front

panel.

2 Place the optimizer microphone on a flat

level surface with the omni-directional

microphone head upward, at your normal

listening position.

• If possible, use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer

mic at the same height as your ears would be when

you are seated in your listening position.

AUTO SETUP

Introduction

Notes

Optimizer microphone setup

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/TUNING

INPUT MODE

TONE CONTROL

MULTI C

INPUT

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING M

AUTO/MAN'L M

PROGRAM INPUT

OPTIMIZER

MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

SPEAKERS

A B

(U.S.A. model)

Optimizer microphone position

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 24 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

AUTO SETUP

PREPARATION

For best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible

during the auto setup procedure. If there is too much

ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory.

If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover

frequency, set the volume to about half way (or slightly less) and

set the crossover frequency to the maximum.

1 Switch on the receiver and video monitor.

Make sure the OSD is displayed.

2 Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then

press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU.

3 Press u / d to select AUTO SETUP, then

press i once to enter the main menu.

4 Press u / d repeatedly to select WIRING,

DISTANCE, SIZE, EQUALIZING or LEVEL.

5 When WIRING, DISTANCE, SIZE or LEVEL is

selected, press j / i to select:

CHECK

To automatically check and adjust the selected

item.

SKIP To skip the selected item and perform no

adjustments.

When using THX speakers, set SIZE to SKIP and make sure

that SMALL or SMLx2 is selected in SPEAKER SET

(page 49) and that 80Hz is selected in CROSS OVER

(page 50).

When EQUALIZING is selected, press j / i to

select:

FRONT To adjust the frequency response of

each speaker in accordance with the

sound of your front speakers.

Recommended if your front speakers

are of much higher quality than your

other speakers.

FLAT To average the frequency response of

all speakers. Recommended if all of

your speakers are of similar quality.

LOW To average the frequency response of

all speakers, giving priority to the

accuracy of bass frequencies.

MID To average the frequency response of

all speakers, giving priority to the

accuracy of mid-range frequencies.

HIGH To average the frequency response of

all speakers, giving priority to the

accuracy of high frequencies.

SKIP To skip the selected item and perform

no adjustments.

6 Press d to select SETUP, then press j / i to

select:

AUTO To automatically perform the entire

auto setup procedure.

STEP To pause for confirmation between

each check in the auto setup procedure.

RELOAD To restore the last auto setup setting.

7 Press d to select START PUSH +, then press

Loud test tones will be output from each speaker and

WAIT appears during the auto setup procedure.

If E-10:OTHER ERROR appears during testing, restart the

procedure from step 3.

Starting the setup

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

AMP

then

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–



SET MENU

. ;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

: Up/Down

: Select

-/+

AUTO:MENU

.WIRING;;;;;CHECK

DISTANCE;;;CHECK

SIZE;;;;;;;CHECK

EQUALIZING;;FLAT

LEVEL;;;;;;CHECK

SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO

START PUSH +

: Up/Down

: Select

-/+

Note

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 25 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

AUTO SETUP

If you selected AUTO in step 6

The RESULT display appears for a few seconds after each

check, then settings of the next item will start. The

RESULT:EXIT display appears after all items are set.

You can display each result by pressing u once and pressing i

repeatedly before exiting. Pressing d returns to the

RESULT:EXIT display.

8 To apply the changes, press j / i to select

SET, then press d to exit.

To cancel the auto setup procedure, press j /

i to select CANCEL, then press d to exit.

If you selected STEP in step 6

The RESULT display appears after each check.

8 Press j / i to display RESULT:EXIT, then

press j / i to select:

Then press d to proceed and check the next item.

EXIT Then press d to exit the auto setup.

•Press u / d repeatedly to move between each display.

• If you are not satisfied with the result or want to manually

adjust each setup parameter, use the manual setup

parameters (see page 49).

• If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your

listening environment, perform AUTO SETUP again to re-

calibrate your system.

• In the DISTANCE results, the distance displayed may be longer

than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your

subwoofer.

• In the EQUALIZING results, different values may be set for the

same band to provide finer adjustments.

If you selected RELOAD in step 6

The RESULT:EXIT display appears.

You can display each result by pressing u once and pressing i

repeatedly before exiting. Pressing d returns to the

RESULT:EXIT display.

8 Press j / i to select SET, then press d to

exit.

Notes

/ : Up/Down

-/+ : Back/Next

RESULT:WIRING

FRONT L;;;;;;;OK

/ : Up/Down

EQ;;;;;FRONT L

63Hz;;;-2.0dB

125Hz;;;-5.0dB

500Hz;;;;;;0dB

630Hz;;;;;;0dB

1.0kHz;;;;;;0dB

3.15kHz;;;+3.0dB

10.0kHz;;;+1.0dB

RESULT:EQUALIZI.

/ : Up/Down

-/+ : Back/Next

. FRONT L;;;;3.20m

CENTER;;;;;3.30m

FRONT R;;;;2.90m

PRES L;;;;;1.70m

PRES R;;;;;1.50m

RESULT:DISTANCE1

/ : Up/Down

-/+ : Back/Next

. FRONT L;;;+5.0dB

CENTER;;;;-4.5dB

FRONT R;;;+5.5dB

PRES L;;;;-3.0dB

PRES R;;;;;;--dB

RESULT:LEVEL 1

/ : Up/Down

-/+ : Back/Next

FRONT L;;;;;;LRG

RESULT:SIZE 1

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 26 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

AUTO SETUP

PREPARATION

■ Troubleshooting for auto setup procedure

Before auto setup

During auto setup

Press j / i to display the detailed information about the individual error. Select RETRY to try auto setup procedure again.

After auto setup

Press j / i to display the detailed information about the individual warning.

• If the warning message W-2 or W-3 appears on the OSD, no corrections are made. In such cases, correct the problem, select CHECK

in DISTANCE or LEVEL, then perform the auto setup procedure again.

• If the message W-1, W-4 or W-5 appears on the OSD, corrections are made. However, the corrections may not be correct. In such

cases, correct the problem, then perform the auto setup procedure again on the relevant setting items.

Error message Cause Remedy

Connect MIC!

Optimizer microphone is not connected. • Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the

OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.

Unplug HP!

Headphones are connected. • Unplug the headphones.

Error message Cause Remedy

E-1:NO FRONT SP

Front L/R channel signal(s) is (are) not

detected.

• Select the front speakers with SPEAKER A or B.

• Check the front L/R speaker connections.

E-2:NO SURR.SP

A surround channel signal is not detected. • Check the surround speaker connections.

E-3:NO PRES. SP

A presence channel signal is not detected. • Check the presence speaker connections.

E-4:SBR->SBL

Only right surround back channel signal is

detected.

• Connect the surround back speaker to the LEFT

SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS terminal if you

only have one surround back speaker.

E-5:NOISY

Background noise is too loud. • Try auto setup procedure in quiet environment.

• Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners

(etc.) or move it away from this unit.

E-6:CHECK SURR.

Surround back speaker(s) is (are) connected,

though surround L/R speakers are not.

• Connect surround speakers when you use (a)

surround back speaker(s).

E-7:NO MIC

The optimizer microphone was unplugged

during the auto setup procedure.

• Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to

OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.

E-8:NO SIGNAL

The optimizer microphone does not detect test

tones.

• Check the microphone setting.

• Check the speaker connections and placement.

E-9:USER CANCEL

The auto setup procedure was cancelled

because a setting which affects the auto setup

was changed during the procedure.

• Perform the auto setup procedure again.

Warning message Cause Remedy

W-1:OUT OF PHASE

Speaker polarity is not correct. This message

may appear depending on the speakers even

when the speakers are connected correctly.

• Check the speaker connections.

W-2:OVER 24m

(80ft)

The distance between the speaker and the

listening position is over 24 m (80 ft.).

• Bring the speaker closer to the listening position.

W-3:LEVEL ERROR

The difference of volume level among speakers

is excessive. (No level correction is made.)

• Readjust the speaker installation.

• Check the speaker connections.

• Use speakers of similar quality.

• Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer.

W-4:SWFR PHASE

The phase polarity of the subwoofer is not

correct.

• We recommend that you select the opposite phase on

the subwoofer if the subwoofer has a phase switch.

W-5:VOL ERROR

The result may not be correct because the

volume was changed during the auto setup

procedure.

• Perform the auto setup procedure again. Do not

change the volume during the auto setup procedure.

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 27 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

BASIC SETUP

The basic system parameters are set automatically when

you run auto setup (page 24). The basic settings are useful

if you want to quickly setup your speakers or to manually

adjust some of the items set in

auto setup.

• If you wish to configure the unit manually using more precise

adjustments, use the detailed parameters in the SOUND menu

(page 49) instead of using the BASIC menu.

• Altering any parameters in the BASIC menu will reset all

parameters in the SOUND menu.

1 Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then

press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU.

2 Press u / d repeatedly to select MANUAL

SETUP, then press j / i to enter the selected

category.

If u is pressed when AUTO SETUP is selected, or if

d is pressed when MANUAL SETUP is selected,

SET MENU will be closed. Press u / d to open SET

MENU again.

3 Press d once to select BASIC MENU,

then press j / i to enter the menu item.

4 When ROOM is selected, press j / i to

change the setting.

Select the size of the room you have installed your

speakers in. Roughly speaking, the room sizes are

defined as follows:

[U.S.A. and Canada models]

S (small) 16 x 13 ft, 200 ft

(4.8 x 4.0 m, 20 m

)

M (medium) 20 x 16 ft, 300 ft

(6.3 x 5.0 m, 30 m

)

L (large) 26 x 19 ft, 450 ft

(7.9 x 5.8 m, 45 m

)

[Other models]

S (small) 3.6 x 2.8 m, 10 m

M (medium) 4.8 x 4.0 m, 20 m

L (large) 6.3 x 5.0 m, 30 m

5 Press d to select SWFR, then press j / i to

select:

YES

If you have a subwoofer in your system.

NONE If you do not have a subwoofer in your system.

6 Press d to select PRESENCE, then press j /

i to select:

YES

If you have presence speakers in your system.

NONE If you do not have presence speakers in your

system.

BASIC SETUP

Using BASIC setup

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

AUDI O

VOL

LEVEL

STRAIGHT

STEREO

ENTERTAIN MOVIE

TEST

ON SCREEN

EFFECT

TV VOL

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

HALL

CHCH

JAZZ

ROCK

TITLE

MUTE

–

3421

MUSIC TV THTR

PHONO

POWER SLEEP

CLEAR

LEARN

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

RE–NAME

INPUT MODE

SYSTEM

AUX

DTV

POWER

REC

POWER

AMP

AVTV

DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

SELECT

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER

MULTI CH IN

2-9

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

AMP

then



SET MENU

;AUTO SETUP

. ;MANUAL SETUP

: Up/Down

: Select

-/+

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

then

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

BASIC MENU 1/2

.ROOM:[SML

SWFR:[YESNONE

PRESENCE;;;;NONE

SPEAKERS;;;;7spk

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 28 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

BASIC SETUP

PREPARATION

7 Press d to select SPEAKERS, then press j /

i to select the number of speakers

connected to the unit.

The choices vary as follows depending on the

PRESENCE setting:

8 After you have finished the settings, press

d, then press j / i to select:

SET To apply the changes.

CANCEL To cancel the setup.

If you select SET, you will hear a test tone from each

speaker.

9 Press d to select CHECK OK?, then press j /

i to select:

YES

To exit the setup if the test tones were

satisfactory.

NO To adjust each speaker level (see page 50).

Choices

PRESENCE setting

YES NONE

——

Front L/R

——

Front L/R,

Center

Presence L/R,

Front L/R

Front L/R,

Surround L/R

Presence L/R,

Front L/R,

Center

Front L/R,

Center,

Surround L/R

Presence L/R,

Front L/R,

Surround L/R

Front L/R,

Center,

Surround L/R,

Surround back

Presence L/R,

Front L/R,

Center,

Surround L/R

Front L/R,

Center,

Surround L/R,

Surround back

L/R

Presence L/R,

Front L/R,

Center,

Surround L/R,

Surround back

——

Presence L/R,

Front L/R,

Center,

Surround L/R,

Surround back

L/R

——

LL C R

SL SB SR

LL C R

SL SB SR

LL R

LL C R

SL SB SR

LL RC

LL C R

SL SB

LL R

SL SR

LL C R

SL SB SR

LL C R

SL SR

LL C R

SL SB SR

LL C R

SL SB SR

LL C R

SL SB SR

.[SET CANCEL

ROOM SIZE=SMALL

1 BASIC MENU 2/2

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.

However, if the power cord is disconnected from the

AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one

week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the

items again.

. CHECK OK?;;;;YES

1 BASIC MENU 2/2

. FR

B)SPEAKER

LEVEL

(when NO is selected)

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 29 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

PLAYBACK

1 Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the

remote control) to turn on the power.

2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

3 Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel.

Each press turns the respective speakers on or off.

When bi-wiring, select both A and B.

4 Select the input source.

Use INPUT (or press one of the input selector buttons

on the remote control) to select the input you desire.

The current input source name and input mode appear

in the front panel display and video monitor for a few

seconds.

5 Start playback or select a broadcast station

on the source component.

Refer to the operation instructions for the component.

6 Adjust the volume to the desired output level.

7 Select a sound field program if desired.

Use PROGRAM (or press AMP to select the AMP

mode, then press one of the sound field program

buttons repeatedly) to select a sound field program.

See page 41 for details about sound field programs.

Dialog Normalisation

When this unit detects Dolby Digital signals, the

following display appears for a few seconds. This shows

how the signal level is being corrected to become the

reference level (-27 dB, THX recommendation).

PLAYBACK

Basic operations

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/TUNING

INPUT MODE

TONE CONTROL

MULTI CH

INPUT

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

VOLUME

PROGRAM INPUT

STANDBY

/ON

OPTIMIZER

MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

SPEAKERS

A B

OPTICALRAUDIOL

VIDEO

S VIDEO

VIDEO AUX

PHONO

POWER SLEEP

CLEAR

LEARN

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

RE–NAME

INPUT MODE

SYSTEM

AUX

DTV

POWER

REC

POWER

AMP

AVTV

DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

SELECT

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER

MULTI CH IN

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

AUDI O

VOL

LEVEL

STRAIGHT

STEREO

ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR

NIGHT

EX/ES

MOVIE

THX /DTS

TEST

ON SCREEN

EFFECT

CHP/INDEX

TV VOL

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

HALL

CHCH

JAZZ

ROCK

TITLE

MUTE

–

3421

+10 ENTER

67 8

(U.S.A. model)

STANDBY

/ON

POWER

SYSTEM

Front panel Remote control

SPEAKERS

A B

TUNERPHONO

AUX

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

MULTI CH IN

INPUT

Front panel Remote control

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

VOLUME

LL R

DVD AUTO

Selected input source

Input mode

VOLUME

VOL

–

Remote control

Front panel

PROGRAM

STEREO

ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR

NIGHT

EX/ES

MOVIE

THX

/DTS

CHP/INDEX

HALL

JAZZ

ROCK

3421

+10 ENTER

67 8

AMP

Remote control

Front panel

DialNorm;;+4dB

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 30 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

To listen with headphones (SILENT CINEMA)

The SILENT CINEMA mode allows you to enjoy multi-

channel music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital

and DTS surround, through ordinary headphones.

SILENT CINEMA activates automatically whenever you

connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening

to CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs. The

“SILENT CINEMA” indicator lights up on the front panel

display. (If the sound field programs are off, you listen

with normal stereo reproduction.)

This unit will not be set to the SILENT CINEMA mode when

MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source.

To adjust the tone

You can adjust the bass/treble

balance for the front left/right and

center channels.

Press TONE CONTROL

repeatedly on the front panel to

select TREBLE or BASS.

Select TREBLE, then rotate

PROGRAM to the right or left to

increase or decrease the high-

frequency response.

Select BASS, then rotate PROGRAM to the right or left to

increase or decrease the low-frequency response.

To cancel the tone control, press TONE CONTROL

repeatedly to select BYPASS.

• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-

frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the

surround speakers may not match that of the front left/right and

center speakers.

• TONE CONTROL is not effective when THX (page 41) or

DIRECT STEREO (page 33) program is selected, or when

MULTI CH INPUT is selected.

• TONE CONTROL is not effective for headphones. Use HP

TONE CTRL to adjust bass/treble balance for the headphones

(page 53).

To mute the sound

Press MUTE on the remote control.

“MUTE” blinks on the front panel

display.

To resume the audio output, press

MUTE again. (or press VOL –/+). “MUTE” disappears

from the display.

You can adjust the muting level (see page 53).

■ Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT

Press MULTI CH INPUT so that “MULTI CH INPUT”

appears in the front panel display and video monitor.

When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display

and/or the video monitor, no other source can be played. To select

another input source with INPUT (or one of the input selector

buttons), press MULTI CH INPUT to turn off “MULTI CH

INPUT” from the front panel display and the video monitor.

■ Playing video sources in the

background

You can combine a video image from a video source with

a sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy

listening to classical music while having beautiful scenery

from the video source on the video monitor.

Use the input selector buttons to select a video source,

then select an audio source.

If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video

source and then press MULTI CH INPUT.

Note

Notes

TONE CONTROL

PROGRAM

MUTE

Note

MULTI CH

INPUT

MULTI CH IN

Front panel Remote control

TUNERPHONO

AUX

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

MULTI CH IN

Audio sources

Video sources

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 31 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

PLAYBACK

■ Front panel operation

Rotate PROGRAM to select the desired program.

The name of the selected program appears on the front

panel display and on the video monitor.

■ Remote control operation

Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press

one of the sound field program buttons

repeatedly to select the desired program.

The name of the selected program appears on the front

panel display and on the video monitor.

Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference,

and not on the name of the program.

• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects

the last sound field program used with that source.

• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the MULTI CH

INPUT is selected.

• Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS 96/

24 signals) will be sampled down to 48 kHz, then sound field

programs will be applied.

■ Enjoying multi-channel software

If you connected a surround back speaker, use this feature

to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel

sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital

Surround EX or DTS ES decoders.

Press EX/ES on the remote control to switch

between 5.1- and 6.1/7.1- channel playback.

To select a decoder, press l/h repeatedly when

PLIIx Movie (etc.) is displayed.

AUTO (AUTO)

When a signal (flag) that can be recognized by the unit is

input, the unit selects the optimum decoder for playing

back the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels.

If the unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present in

the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1/

7.1 channels.

Decoders (select with l/h)

You can select from the following modes depending on the

format of the software you are playing.

PLIIx Movie For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS

signals in 7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx movie

decoder.

PLIIx Music For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS

signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx music

decoder.

EX/ES For playing back Dolby Digital signals in 6.1/7.1

channels using the Dolby Digital Surround EX decoder.

DTS signals are played back in 6.1/7.1 channels using the

DTS ES decoder.

EX For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/

7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital Surround EX

decoder.

OFF (OFF)

For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 5.1

channels.

When SURR B L/R SP is set to “LRGx1” or “SMLx1” (see

page 49), the surround back channel will be output from the left

SURROUND BACK speaker terminals.

Selecting sound field programs

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/TUNING

INPUT MODE

TONE CONTROL

MULTI CH

INPUT

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

VOLUME

PROGRAM INPUT

STANDBY

/ON

OPTIMIZER

MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

SPEAKERS

A B

OPTICALRAUDIOL

VIDEO

S VIDEO

VIDEO AUX

PROGRAM

(U.S.A. model)

JAZZ CLUB

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

HiFi DSP

VOLUME

LL R

Program name

PROGRAM

PHONO

POWER SLEEP

CLEAR

LEARN

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

RE–NAME

INPUT MODE

SYSTEM

AUX

DTV

POWER

REC

AUDI O

POWER

AMP

AVTV

DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

SELECT

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER

MULTI CH IN

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

LEVEL

STRAIGHT

STEREO

ENTERTAIN

NIGHT

MOVIE

THX

/DTS

TEST

ON SCREEN

EFFECT

CHP/INDEX

TV VOL

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

HALL

CHCH

JAZZ

ROCK

TITLE

MUTE

–

3421

+10 ENTER

67 8

MUSIC TV THTR

EX/ES

Sound field

program

buttons

AMP

JAZZ CLUB

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

HiFi DSP

VOLUME

LL R

program name

MUSIC TV THTR

EX/ES

STEREO

ENTERTAIN

NIGHT

MOVIE

THX

/DTS

CHP/INDEX

HALL

JAZZ

ROCK

3421

+10 ENTER

67 8

Notes

EX/ES

CHP/INDEX

ENTER

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 32 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

• Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal (flag)

which this unit can automatically detect. When playing these

kinds of discs with 6.1-channel, select “ON”.

• 6.1-channel playback is not possible even if EX/ES is pressed in

the following cases:

– When SURR B L/R SP is set to “NONE” (see page 49).

– When the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jack is

being played.

– When the source being played does not contain surround L/R

channel signals.

– When Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.

– When “2ch Stereo”, “7ch Stereo” or “Direct Stereo” is

selected.

• When the power of this unit is turned off, the input mode will be

reset to AUTO.

• When the DTS ES decoder is applied to DTS 96/24 signals, you

cannot use the DTS 96/24 decoding feature.

• The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when SURR B L/R

SP is set to “NONE” (see page 49).

• “PLIIx Movie” cannot be selected when SURR B L/R SP is set

to “LRGx1” or “SMLx1” (see page 49).

■ Enjoying 2-channel software

Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played

back on multiple channels.

Press q/DTS on the remote control to select the

decoder.

You can select from the following modes depending on the

type of software you are playing and your personal

preference.

PRO LOGIC SUR. STANDARD

Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources.

PRO LOGIC SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Surround

sources

PRO LOGIC IIx Movie

Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for movie software.

PRO LOGIC IIx Music

Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for music software.

PRO LOGIC IIx Game

Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for game software.

DTS Neo:6 Cinema

DTS processing for movie software.

DTS Neo:6 Music

DTS processing for music software.

Use the PLII/PLIIx parameter to select the Pro Logic II or

Pro Logic IIx decoders (see page 76).

The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when SURR B L/R SP

is set to “NONE” (see page 49).

■ Listening to high fidelity stereo sound

(Direct Stereo)

Direct Stereo allows you to bypass this unit’s decoders and

DSP processors to enjoy pure high fidelity sound from 2-

channel PCM and analog sources.

Rotate PROGRAM (or press AMP to select the

AMP mode, then press STEREO repeatedly) to

select DIRECT STEREO.

• To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in

this mode.

• When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input,

this unit automatically selects an analog signal input. (When

DTS is selected as an input mode, no sound will be heard.)

• No sound will be output from the subwoofer.

• TONE CONTROL (page 31) and SET MENU (page 47)

settings are not effective.

• The front panel display automatically dims.

■ Listening at night

This mode reproduces dialogue clearly while reducing the

volume of loud sound effects for easier listening at low

volumes or at night.

Press NIGHT on the remote control.

The NIGHT indicator in the front panel

display lights up.

Press NIGHT again to cancel. The

NIGHT indicator goes off.

• You can use the night listening mode with any sound field

programs except Direct Stereo (even though the NIGHT

indicator lights up during Direct Stereo mode).

• Night listening mode may vary in effectiveness depending on

the input source and surround sound settings you use.

Notes

/DTS

Note

Notes

STEREO

ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR

NIGHT

EX/ES

MOVIE

THX

/DTS

CHP/INDEX

HALL

JAZZ

ROCK

3421

+10 ENTER

67 8

Direct Stereo

Front panel

PROGRAM

Remote control

NIGHT

+10

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 33 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

PLAYBACK

■ Downmixing to 2 channels

You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback even from multi-

channel sources.

Rotate PROGRAM (or press STEREO on the

remote control) to select 2ch Stereo.

You can use a subwoofer with this program when SWFR or

BOTH is selected in LFE/BASS OUT.

■ Listening to unprocessed input signals

Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to select STRAIGHT.

Two channel stereo sources are output from only the front

left and right speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded

straight into the appropriate channels without any

additional effect processing.

Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT again so that “STRAIGHT”

disappears from the display when you want to turn the

sound effect back on.

■ Virtual CINEMA DSP

Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA

DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates

virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field.

If you do not connect surround speakers, Virtual CINEMA

DSP activates automatically whenever you select a

CINEMA DSP sound field program.

Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate, even when SURR L/R

SP is set to “NONE” (see page 49) in the following cases:

– When MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source.

– When headphones are connected.

This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the

following to select the type of input signals you want to

use.

1 Select the input source.

2 Press INPUT MODE to select an input mode.

In most cases, use AUTO.

AUTO Automatically selects input signals in

the following order:

1) Digital signals*

2) Analog signals

DTS Selects only digital signals encoded in

DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no

sound is output.

ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no

analog signals are input, no sound is

output.

* If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the

decoder automatically switches to the appropriate sound

field program.

You can adjust the default input mode this unit selects when the

power is turned on (see page 54).

Note

2ch Stereo

STEREO

ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR

NIGHT

EX/ES

MOVIE

THX

/DTS

CHP/INDEX

HALL

JAZZ

ROCK

3421

+10 ENTER

67 8

Front panel

PROGRAM

Remote control

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

Front panel Remote control

Selecting input modes

INPUT

TUNERPHONO

AUX

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

MULTI CH IN

Front panel Remote control

INPUT MODE

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

VOLUME

LL R

DVD

AUTO

TUNERPHONO

POWER SLEEP

CLEAR

LEARN

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

RE–NAME

INPUT MODE

SYSTEM

MULTI CH IN

Front panel Remote control

Input mode

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 34 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

PLAYBACK

BASIC

OPERATION

• When you play DTS encoded sources with the input mode set to

AUTO:

– This unit automatically switches to the DTS decoding mode.

The unit remains in DTS mode (and the “t” indicator may

flash) for up to 30 second after playback of the DTS source is

complete. To manually release the DTS mode, press INPUT

MODE to reselect AUTO.

– The DTS decoding mode may be released if search or skip

operations are performed for more than 30 seconds. To

prevent this, press INPUT MODE to select DTS.

• If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any

way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you

make a digital connection between this unit and the player.

Displaying the information about the input

source

You can display the type, format and sampling frequency

of the current input signal.

1 Select the input source.

2 Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then

press STRAIGHT/EFFECT so that

“STRAIGHT” appears in the display.

3 Press u / d to display the following

information about the input signal.

(Format) Signal format display. When the unit

cannot detect a digital signal it

automatically switches to analog input.

in Number of source channels in the input

signal. For example, a multi-channel

soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2

surround channels and LFE, is

displayed as “3/2/ LFE”.

fs Sampling frequency. When the unit is

unable to detect the sampling

frequency “Unknown” appears.

rate Bit rate. When the unit is unable to

detect the bit rate “Unknown” appears.

flg Flag data encoded with DTS or Dolby

Digital signals that cue this unit to

automatically switch decoders.

Notes

TUNERPHONO

AUX

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

MULTI CH IN

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

AMP

then

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 35 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

TUNING

There are 2 tuning methods; automatic and manual.

Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are

strong and there is no interference.

■ Automatic tuning

1 Rotate INPUT (or press TUNER on the remote

control) to select TUNER as the input source.

2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.

“FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display.

3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the

front panel display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning

is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to

turn the colon (:) off.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin

automatic tuning.

Press h to tune in to a higher frequency, or press l

to tune in to a lower frequency.

When tuned in to a station, the “TUNED” indicator

lights up and the frequency of the received station is

shown on the front panel display.

■ Manual tuning

If the signal from the station you want to select is weak,

you must tune into it manually. Manually tuning in to an

FM station will automatically change the reception mode

to monaural to increase the signal quality.

1 Select TUNER and the reception band

following steps 1 and 2 as described in

“Automatic tuning”.

2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the “AUTO” indicator disappears from

the front panel display.

If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning

is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to

turn the colon (:) off.

3 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune in to

the desired station manually.

Hold down the button to

continue searching.

TUNING

Automatic and manual tuning

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/TUNING

INPUT MODE

TONE CONTROL

MULTI CH

INPUT

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

VOLUME

PROGRAM INPUT

STANDBY

/ON

OPTIMIZER

MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

SPEAKERS

A B

OPTICALRAUDIOL

VIDEO

S VIDEO

VIDEO AUX

3 2 34 1

(U.S.A. model)

INPUT

TUNERPHONO

AUX

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

MULTI CH IN

Front panel

Remote control

FM/AM

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

AUT

Lights up

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TU

TUNED

AUTO

A~~AM~1440 kHz

PRESET/TUNING

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TU

TUNED

AUTO

A~~AM~1530 kHz

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

AUT

Disappears

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUN

TUNED

A~~AM~1440 kHz

PRESET/TUNING

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 36 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

■ Automatically presetting FM stations

You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store

FM stations. This function enables this unit to

automatically tune in to FM stations with strong signals,

and to store up to 40 (8 stations x 5 groups, A1-E8) of

those stations in order. You can then recall any preset

station easily by selecting the preset station number.

1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band.

2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO)

so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the

front panel display.

3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)

for more than 3 seconds.

The preset number, the “MEMORY” and “AUTO”

indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic

presetting starts from the frequency currently

displayed and proceeds toward the higher

frequencies.

When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front

panel display shows the frequency of the last preset

station.

• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is

cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.

• If the number of the received stations does not reach 40 (E8)

E8, automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after

searching all stations.

• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored

automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you

want to store is weak in signal strength, tune in to it manually in

the monaural mode, and store it by following the procedure in

“Manually presetting stations”.

Automatic preset tuning options

You can select the preset number from which this unit will

store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower

frequencies.

After pressing MEMORY in step 3:

1 Press A/B/C/D/E, then PRESET/TUNING l / h to

select the preset number under which the first station

will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when

stations have all been stored up to E8.

2 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon

(:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin

tuning toward lower frequencies.

Presetting stations

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/TUNING

INPUT MODE

TONE CONTROL

MULTI CH

INPUT

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

VOLUME

PROGRAM INPUT

STANDBY

/ON

OPTIMIZER

MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

SPEAKERS

A B

OPTICALRAUDIOL

VIDEO

S VIDEO

VIDEO AUX

321

(U.S.A. model)

FM/AM

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

AUT

Lights up

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

AUTO

MEMORY

VOLUME

LL R

A1:FM 87.5 MHz

Notes

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby

mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC

outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to

power failure. However, if the power is cut for more

than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If

so, store the stations again by using the presetting

station methods.

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 37 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

TUNING

■ Manually presetting stations

You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups)

manually.

1 Tune in to a station.

See page 36 for tuning instructions.

When tuned in to a station, the front panel display

shows the frequency of the station received.

2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).

The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about 5

seconds.

3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset

station group (A to E) while the “MEMORY”

indicator is flashing.

The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:)

appears on the front panel display.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a

preset station number (1 to 8) while the

“MEMORY” indicator is flashing.

Press h to select a higher preset station number.

Press l to select a lower preset station number.

5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the

front panel while the “MEMORY” indicator is

flashing.

The station band and

frequency appear on the front

panel display with the preset

group and number you have

selected.

6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations.

• Any stored station data existing under a preset number is

cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.

• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with

the station frequency.

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/TUNING

INPUT MODE

TONE CONTROL

MULTI CH

INPUT

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

VOLUME

PROGRAM INPUT

STANDBY

/ON

OPTIMIZER

MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

SPEAKERS

A B

OPTICALRAUDIOL

VIDEO

S VIDEO

VIDEO AUX

3 2,5

(U.S.A. model)

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

TUNED

VOLUME

A B

LL R

A :AM 630 kHz

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

MEMORY

Flashes

A/B/C/D/E

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

TUNED MEMORY

VOLUME

LL R

C :AM 630 kHz

Notes

PRESET/TUNING

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

TUNED MEMORY

VOLUME

LL R

C3:AM 630 kHz

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

TUNED MEMORY

VOLUME

LL R

C3:AM 630 kHz

Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3.

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 38 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

TUNING

BASIC

OPERATION

You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the

preset station number under which it was stored.

1 Press A/B/C/D/E to select the preset station

group.

The preset group letter appears on the front panel

display and changes each time you press the button.

2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET j / i

on the remote control) to select a preset

station number (1 to 8).

The preset group and number appear on the front

panel display along with the station band, frequency

and the “TUNED” indicator lights up.

You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations

with each other. The example below describes the

procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”.

1 Select preset station “E1” by using the

A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h.

See “Selecting preset stations”.

2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for

more than 3 seconds.

“E1” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the

front panel display.

3 Select preset station “A5” by using

A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h.

“A5” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the

front panel display.

4 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again.

The stations stored at the two preset assignments are

exchanged.

Selecting preset stations

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/TUNING

INPUT MODE

TONE CONTROL

MULTI CH

INPUT

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

VOLUME

PROGRAM INPUT

STANDBY

/ON

OPTIMIZER

MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

SPEAKERS

A B

OPTICALRAUDIOL

VIDEO

S VIDEO

VIDEO AUX

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

LEVEL

STRAIGHT

TEST

ON SCREEN

EFFECT

TV VOL

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

TITLE

MUTE

–

(U.S.A. model)

A/B/C/D/E

SET MENU

A/B/C/D/E

Front panel Remote control

PRESET/TUNING

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

TUNED

E1:FM 87.5 MHz

Front panel

Remote control

Exchanging preset stations

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/TUNING

INPUT MODE

TONE CONTROL

MULTI CH

INPUT

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

VOLUME

PROGRAM INPUT

STANDBY

/ON

OPTIMIZER

MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

SPEAKERS

A B

OPTICALRAUDIOL

VIDEO

S VIDEO

VIDEO AUX

1,3

2,4

(U.S.A. model)

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

TUNED MEMORY

E1:FM 87.5 MHz

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

TUNED MEMORY

VOLUME

A B

LL R

A5:FM 90.6 MHz

EDIT

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT E1-A5

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–

Shows the exchange of stations is complete.

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 39 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

RECORDING

Recording adjustments and other operations are

performed from the recording components. Refer to the

operation instructions for those components.

1 Turn on the power of this unit and all

connected components.

2 Select the source component you want to

record from.

3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station)

on the source component.

4 Start recording on the recording component.

• Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.

• When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record

between other components connected to this unit.

• The setting of TONE CONTROL, VOLUME, “Speaker level”

(page 50) and programs does not affect the recorded material.

• A source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit

cannot be recorded.

• S-video and composite video signals pass independently

through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or

dubbing video signals, if your video source component is

connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite

video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a

composite video) signal to your VCR.

• A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT

channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not

output on VCR 1 OUT.)

• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from

records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may

infringe copyright laws.

■ Special considerations when recording

DTS software

The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to

digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise

being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to

record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them,

the following considerations and adjustments need to be

made.

For LDs, DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your

player is compatible with the DTS format, follow its

operation instruction to make a setting so that the analog

signal will be output from the player.

RECORDING

PRESET/TUNING

EDIT

FM/AM

A/B/C/D/E

PRESET/TUNING

INPUT MODE

TONE CONTROL

MULTI CH

INPUT

STRAIGHT

EFFECT

MEMORY

MAN'L/AUTO FM

TUNING MODE

AUTO/MAN'L MONO

VOLUME

PROGRAM INPUT

STANDBY

/ON

OPTIMIZER

MIC

PHONES

SILENT CINEMA

SPEAKERS

A B

OPTICALRAUDIOL

VIDEO

S VIDEO

VIDEO AUX

1 2

(U.S.A. model)

INPUT

TUNERPHONO

AUX

DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

MULTI CH IN

Front panel Remote control

Notes

If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or

encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the

picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 40 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

SOUND FIELD

PROGRAMS

This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multichannel playback from

almost any sound source (stereo or multichannel). This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field

processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.

Most of these sound field programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous

concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters.

The Yamaha CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set INPUT MODE to

AUTO (see page 34) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal.

You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI”

can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “

2-CH” can be used with 2-channel

(stereo) sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc.

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

For movie/video sources

Program Features Sources

STEREO:

2ch Stereo

Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 (left and right) channels or plays back 2-channel

sources as is.

MULTI

2-CH

MOVIE THEATER:

Spectacle

CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm

movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the

sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby

Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions).

MOVIE THEATER:

Sci-Fi

CINEMA DSP processing. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the

latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space

amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes

Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced

techniques.

MOVIE THEATER:

Adventure

CINEMA DSP processing. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of

the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to

that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained

as much as possible.

MOVIE THEATER:

General

CINEMA DSP processing. This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and

multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by soft and extensive sound field. The

presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen,

restraining the echo effect of conversations without losing clarity.

THX Cinema

THX processing for any multi-channel sources.

THX Surr. EX

THX processing for Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital EX sources. This program is available

only when surround back L/R speakers are connected to this unit and when the input source

contains surround back channel signals.

MULTI

dts ES+THX

THX processing for DTS ES sources.

DOLBY DIGITAL:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 5.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.

DOLBY DIGITAL:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Digital sources.

q D+PLIIx Movie:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 6.1/7.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.

q D+PLIIx Movie:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1/7.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.

DOLBY D EX:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 6.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 41 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

DOLBY D EX:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for Dolby Digital

sources.

MULTI

DTS:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 5.1 channel processing for DTS and 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources.

DTS:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for DTS sources.

DTS+PLIIx Movie:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 6.1/7.1 channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx) for DTS sources.

DTS+PLIIx Movie:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1/7.1 channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx) for DTS sources.

DTS+DOLBY EX:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources.

DTS+DOLBY EX:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources.

DTS ES Mtrx 6.1:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS ES Matrix) for DTS sources.

DTS ES Mtrx 6.1:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing (DTS ES Matrix) for DTS sources.

DTS ES Dscrt 6.1:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS ES Discrete) for DTS sources.

DTS ES Dscrt 6.1:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced processing (DTS ES Discrete) for DTS sources.

PRO LOGIC:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources.

2-CH

PRO LOGIC:

SUR. ENHANCED

CINEMA DSP enhanced precessing for Dolby Surround sources.

PRO LOGIC IIx:

PLIIx Movie

Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software.

PRO LOGIC II:

PLII Movie

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software.

PRO LOGIC IIx:

PLIIx Game

Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for game software.

PRO LOGIC II:

PLII Game

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game software.

DTS: Neo:6 Cinema

DTS processing for movie software.

Program Features Sources

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 42 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc.

For music sources

Program Features Sources

CONCERT HALL

HiFi DSP processing. A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats.

Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which produce a very full,

rich sound.

MULTI

2-CH

JAZZ CLUB

HiFi DSP processing. This is the sound field at stage front in “The bottom Line”, a famous

New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering

a real and vibrant sound.

ROCK CONCERT

HiFi DSP processing. The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this

program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left

of the hall.

ENTERTAINMENT:

Disco

HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the

heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by high-

energy, “immediate” sound.

q D+PLIIx Music:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.

MULTI

q D+PLIIx Music:

SUR. ENHANCED

DSP enhanced Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.

DTS+PLIIx Music:

SUR. STANDARD

Standard DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.

DTS+PLIIx Music:

SUR. ENHANCED

DSP enhanced DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources.

STEREO:

2ch Stereo

2 (left and right) channel playback.

2-CH

STEREO:

Direct Stereo

Use to output stereo sources to only the front left and right speakers without any processing.

STEREO:

7ch Stereo

Use to increase the output stereo sources (in stereo) from all speakers. This provides a larger

sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc.

PRO LOGIC IIx:

PLIIx Music

Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music software.

PRO LOGIC II:

PLII Music

Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music software.

DTS: Neo:6 Music

DTS processing for music software.

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 43 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

ADVANCED OPERATIONS

You can display this unit’s operating information on a

video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and sound

field program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much

easier to see the available options and parameters than it is

by reading this information on the front panel display.

1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this

unit.

2 Press ON SCREEN repeatedly to change the

OSD mode.

The OSD mode changes in the

following order: full display, short

display, and display off.

Full display

Always shows the sound field program parameter settings

as well as the contents of the front panel display.

Short display

Briefly shows the contents of the front panel display at the

bottom of the screen each time you operate this unit.

Display off

• The OSD signal is not output to the REC OUT jack, and will

not be recorded.

• You can set the OSD to turn on (gray background) or off when

a video source is not being reproduced (or the source

component is turned off) by using “Display set” (see page 56).

Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the

standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep

timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit

is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also

automatically turns off any external components

connected to the AC OUTLET(S).

■ Setting the sleep timer

1 Select a source and start playback on the

source component.

2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to

set the amount of time.

Each time you press SLEEP, the front

panel display changes as shown

below. The SLEEP indicator flashes

while switching the amount of time for sleep timer.

The “SLEEP” indicator lights up on the front panel

display after the sleep timer has been set.

ADVANCED OPERATIONS

Selecting the OSD mode

Notes

ON SCREEN

DISPLAY

P02

CONCERT

HALL

.DSPLEVEL;;;;0dB

INITDLY;;;;30ms

ROOMSIZE;;;;1.0



LIVENESS;;;;;;;5

P02CONCERTHALL



Full display Short display

Using the sleep timer

PHONO

POWER SLEEP

CLEAR

LEARN

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

RE–NAME

INPUT MODE

SYSTEM

AUX

DTV

POWER POWER

AMP

AVTV

DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

SELECT

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER

MULTI CH IN

SLEEP

SLEEP 120 min. SLEEP 90 min.

SLEEP 60 min.SLEEP 30 min.SLEEP OFF

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

HiFi DSP

VOLUME

SLEEP

LL R

SLEEP 120min

V–AUX

DVR/VCR2

VCR 1

CBL/SAT

DTV DVD

MD/TAPE

CD–R CD TUNER

PHONO

HiFi DSP

VOLUME

SLEEP

LL R

CONCERT HALL

SLEEP Indicator

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 44 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

ADVANCED OPERATIONS

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Canceling the sleep timer

Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears on

the front panel display.

After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, and the

“SLEEP” indicator goes off.

The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing

STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the

front panel) to set this unit to the standby mode.

You can adjust the output level of each speaker while

listening to a music source. This is also possible when

playing sources through the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.

Please note that this operation will override the level

adjustments made in “AUTO SETUP” (page 24),

“Speaker level” (page 50) and “Using the test tone”

(page 46).

1 Press AMP to select the AMP

mode.

2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select

the speaker you want to adjust.

FRONT L Front left speaker level

CENTER Center speaker level

FRONT R Front right speaker level

SUR.R Surround right speaker level

SUR.B.R Surround back right speaker level

SUR.B.L Surround back left speaker level

SUR.L Surround left speaker level

SWFR Subwoofer level

PRES Presence speaker level

Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker by

pressing u / d.

3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level.

• The control range is from +10 dB to –10 dB.

When inputting digital signals with sampling frequencies higher

than 48 kHz, only the subwoofer level can be adjusted.

SLEEP

Manually adjusting speaker levels

Note

POWER

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

AUDI O

VOL

LEVEL

STRAIGHT

TEST

ON SCREEN

EFFECT

TV VOL

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

TITLE

MUTE

POWER

AMP

AVTV

–

AMP

TV INPUT

LEVEL

TITLE

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 45 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

ADVANCED OPERATIONS

You can use the test tone feature to manually balance your

speaker levels. Please note that this operation will override

the level adjustments made in “AUTO SETUP” (page 24),

“Speaker level” (page 50) and “Manually adjusting

speaker levels” (page 45). Use the test tone to set speaker

levels so that the volume from each speaker is identical

when heard from your listening position.

• Use a handheld SPL meter, hold at arms length and point

upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the

meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each

speaker to 75 dB.

• Before outputting the test tone, we recommend that you set the

output volume to 0 dB.

You cannot enter test mode if headphones are connected to the

PHONES jack. Remove the headphones from the PHONES jack.

1 Press AMP to select the AMP mode.

2 Press TEST.

The unit will output a test tone.

TEST LEFT Front left speaker

TEST CENTER Center speaker

TEST RIGHT Front right speaker

TEST R SUR. Right surround speaker

TEST R SUR. B Right surround back speaker

TEST L SUR. B Left surround back speaker

TEST L SUR. Left surround speaker

TEST SUBWOOFER Subwoofer

3 Press u / d repeatedly to select the speaker

you want to adjust.

4 Press j / i to adjust speaker volumes.

If you do not use the presence speakers

5 Press TEST when you have completed your

adjustment.

The test tone stops.

If PRESENCE is set to YES, press TEST twice to stop the test

tone.

If you use the presence speakers

5 Press TEST.

The unit will output a test tone.

TEST FRONT Front speakers

TEST PRESENCE Presence speakers

TEST PRES L Presence left speaker

TEST PRES R Presence right speaker

6 Press u / d repeatedly to select the speaker

you want to adjust.

7 Press j / i to adjust speaker volumes.

8 Press TEST when you have completed your

adjustment.

The test tone stops.

Using the test tone

Note

POWER

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

AUDI O

VOL

LEVEL

STRAIGHT

TEST

ON SCREEN

EFFECT

TV VOL

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

TITLE

MUTE

POWER

AMP

AVTV

–

2,5

Note

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 46 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

You can use the following parameters in the set menu to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this

unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening

environment.

■ Auto Setup

Use to specify which speaker parameters auto setup will adjust, and to activate the auto setup procedure (see page 24).

■ Manual Setup

Use to manually adjust speaker and system settings.

Most of the parameters described in the SOUND menu are set automatically when you run auto setup (see page 24). You can use the

SOUND menu to make further adjustments, but we recommend running auto setup first.

Basic menu

Use to quickly setup basic system parameters (see page 28).

Sound menu

Use to manually adjust any speaker setting or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors

or projectors.

Input menu

Use to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input mode, rename your inputs, or specify external input settings.

SET MENU

Item Features Page

SPEAKER SET

Selects the output mode suitable for each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output,

and the cross over frequency.

SP LEVEL

Adjusts the output level of each speaker.

SP DISTANCE

Adjusts the delay time of each speaker.

GRAPHIC EQ

Adjusts the tonal quality of each speaker.

LFE LEVEL

Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

DYNAMIC RANGE

Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

LOW FRQ. TEST

Matches the subwoofer level with the level of the other speakers.

HP TONE CTRL

Adjusts the tonal balance of the headphones.

AUDIO SET

Customizes overall audio settings of this unit.

PR/SBch SELECT

Selects priority to either surround back or presence speakers when both sets of speakers are

connected to this unit.

Item Features Page

I/O ASSIGN

Assigns jacks according to the component to be used.

INPUT MODE

Selects the initial input mode of the source.

INPUT RENAME

Changes the name of the inputs.

EXT.INPUT

Sets the direction of the signals input into the center, subwoofer and surround channels for the

source component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 47 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

SET MENU

Option menu

Use to adjust the optional system settings.

Use the remote control to access and adjust each

parameter.

1 Press AMP to select the AMP

mode.

2 Press u / d to select AUTO SETUP or

MANUAL SETUP, then press j / i to enter the

selected category.

If u is pressed when AUTO SETUP is selected, or if d is

pressed when MANUAL SETUP is selected, SET MENU

will be closed. Press u / d to open SET MENU again.

3 Press u / d repeatedly to select a menu,

then press j / i to enter the menu item.

Repeat this operation to navigate to and enter the

setup mode of the item you want to adjust.

4 Press j / i repeatedly to change the setting of

the item you want to adjust.

5 To exit, press u / d repeatedly until the

menu disappears or just press one of the

sound field program group buttons.

Item Features Page

DISPLAY SET

Adjusts the OSD and converts video signals.

MEMORY GUARD

Locks sound field program parameters and other SET MENU settings.

PARAM. INI

Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs.

SP IMP. SET

Selects the impedance of your speakers.

ZONE SET

Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.

ZONE2 SET

Selects the Zone 2 mode.

Using SET MENU

POWER

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

AUDI O

VOL

LEVEL

STRAIGHT

STEREO

ENTERTAIN

NIGHT

MOVIE

THX

/DTS

TEST

ON SCREEN

EFFECT

CHP/INDEX

TV VOL

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

HALL

CHCH

JAZZ

ROCK

TITLE

MUTE

POWER

AMP

AVTV

–

3421

ENTER

67 8

MUSIC TV THTR

EX/ES

2,3,5

2,3,4

AMP



SET MENU

. ;AUTO SETUP

;MANUAL SETUP

: Up/Down

: Select

-/+

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

then

Memory back-up

The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data

from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.

However, if the power cord is disconnected from the

AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one

week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the

items again.

TV VOL

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHCH

–

STEREO

ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR

NIGHT

EX/ES

MOVIE

THX /DTS

CHP/INDEX

HALL

JAZZ

ROCK

3421

+10 ENTER

67 8

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 48 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

Use to manually adjust any speaker setting or compensate

for video signal processing delays when using LCD

monitors or projectors. Most of the SOUND parameters

are set automatically when you run auto setup (see

page 24).

■ Speaker set SPEAKER SET

Use to manually adjust any speaker setting.

Set any THX speakers to SMALL.

MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > SPEAKER SET >

Center speaker CENTER SP

Choices: LARGE, SMALL, NONE

• Select LARGE if you have a large center speaker. The

unit directs the entire range of the center channel signal

to the center speaker.

• Select SMALL if you have a small center speaker. The

unit directs the low-frequency signals of the center

channel to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”.

• Select NONE if you do not have a center speaker. The

unit directs all of the center channel signal to the front

left and right speakers.

Front speakers FRONT SP

Choices: LARGE, SMALL

• Select LARGE if you have large front speakers. The

unit directs the entire range of the front left and right

channel signals to the front left and right speakers.

• Select SMALL if you have small front speakers. The

unit directs the low-frequency signals of the front

channel to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”.

Surround left/right speakers SURR L/R SP

Choices: LARGE, SMALL, NONE

• Select LARGE if you have large surround left and right

speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the

surround speakers. The entire range of the surround

channel signal is directed to the surround left and right

speakers.

• Select SMALL if you have small surround left and

right speakers. The low-frequency signals of the

surround channel are directed to the speakers selected

with “BASS OUT”.

• Select NONE if you do not have surround speakers.

This will set the unit to the Virtual CINEMA DSP

mode (see page 34) and automatically set the surround

back speaker setting (SURR B L/R SP below) to

NONE.

Surround back left/right speakers

SURR B L/R SP

Choices: LRGx2, LRGx1, SMLx2, SMLx1, NONE

• Select LRGx2 if you have 2 large surround back

speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the

surround back channel signal to the surround back

speakers.

• Select LRGx1 if you have a large surround back

speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the

surround back channel signal to the left surround back

speaker.

• Select SMLx2 if you have 2 small surround back

speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround

back channels are directed to the speakers selected with

“BASS OUT”.

• Select SMLx1 if you have a small surround back

speaker. The low-frequency signals of the surround

back channel are directed to the speakers selected with

“BASS OUT”, and the rest of the frequency signals are

directed to the left surround back speaker.

• Select NONE if you do not have a surround back

speaker. The unit directs all of the surround back

channel signal to the surround left and right speakers.

If you select LRGx1 or SMLx1, connect a speaker to the left

SURROUND BACK speaker terminals.

Manual setup: SOUND

Note

. A)SPEAKERSET

B)SPEAKERLEVEL

C)SPDISTANCE

D)GRAFICEQ



: Up/Down

: Select

-/+

2 SOUND

NONE [SML LRG

CENTER SP

[SMALL LARGE

FRONT SP

Note

NONE [SML LRG

SURR L/R SP

SWLx1 [SMLx2

SURR B L/R SP

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 49 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

SET MENU

Presence speakers PRESENCE SP

Choices: NONE, YES

• Select YES if you have presence speakers.

• Select NONE if you do not have presence speakers.

LFE/bass out LFE/BASS OUT

LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit

decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. The Low-

frequency signals can be directed to both front left and

right speakers, and to the subwoofer (subwoofer can be

used for both stereo reproduction and the sound field

program).

Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), FRNT, BOTH

THX recommendation: SWFR

• Select SWFR if you connect a subwoofer. The unit

directs all LFE and low-frequency signals to the

subwoofer.

• Select FRNT if you do not connect a subwoofer. The

unit directs all low-frequency and LFE signals to the

front speakers (even if you have previously set FRONT

SP to SMALL).

• Select BOTH to direct LFE signals to the subwoofer.

Other low-frequency signals are directed to both the

subwoofer and the other front channels in accordance

with your other speaker settings.

Cross over CROSS OVER

Use this feature to select a cross-over (cut-off) frequency

for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the

selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer.

Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,

120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz

THX recommendation: 80Hz

■ Speaker level SP LEVEL

Use these settings to manually balance the speaker levels

between the front left or surround left speakers and each

speaker selected in SPEAKER SET (page 49).

MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > SP LEVEL >

Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB

• FR adjusts the balance of the front left and front right

speakers.

• C adjusts the balance of the front left and center

speakers.

• SL adjusts the balance of the front left and surround

left speakers.

• SBL* adjusts the balance of the surround left and

surround back left speakers.

• SBR* adjusts the balance of the surround left and

surround back right speakers.

• SR adjusts the balance of the surround left and

surround right speakers.

• SWFR adjusts the balance of the front left speaker and

subwoofer.

• PRES adjusts the balance of the front and presence

speakers.

SB will be displayed if you selected only one surround back

speaker in SURR B L/R SP (page 49).

Use a handheld SPL meter, hold at arms length and point upwards

so that the meter is in the listening position. With the meter set to

the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each speaker to 75 dB.

NONE [YES

PRESENCE SP

[SWFR FRNT BOTH

LFE/BASS OUT

FREQ;;;80Hz(THX)

CROSS OVER

. FR

B)SPEAKER

LEVEL

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 50 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Speaker distance SP DISTANCE

Use this feature to manually input the distance of each

speaker and adjust the delay applied to respective channel.

Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the

main listening position. However, this is not possible in

most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay

must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all

sound will arrive at the listening position at the same time.

To access these parameters, select:

MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > SP DISTANCE >

Unit UNIT

Choices: meters (m), feet (ft)

Initial setting:

U.S.A. and Canada models: feet (ft)

Other models: meters (m)

• Select meters to input speaker distances in meters.

• Select feet to input speaker distances in feet.

Speaker distances

Choices: 0.3 to 24.00 m (1 to 80 ft)

• FRONT L adjusts the distance of the front left speaker.

Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

• FRONT R adjusts the distance of the front right

speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

• CENTER adjusts the distance of the center speaker.

Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

• SURR L adjusts the distance of the surround left

speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

• SURR R adjusts the distance of the surround right

speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

• SB adjusts the distance of the surround back left

speakers. Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft)

• SWFR adjusts the distance of the subwoofer. Initial

setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft)

■ Graphic equalizer GRAPHIC EQ

Use this feature to select parametric (PEQ) or graphic

equalizer (GEQ).

To access these parameters, select:

MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > GRAPHIC EQ >

Equalizer select EQ SELECT

Choices: PEQ, GEQ

• Select PEQ to use the equalizer adjusted in auto setup.

• Select GEQ to adjust the built-in 7-band graphic

equalizer so that the center, surround L/R and surround

back L/R speakers tonal quality matches that of the left

and right front speakers.

Choices: –6 to +6 (dB)

You can adjust 7 frequency bands: 63Hz, 160Hz, 400Hz,

1kHz, 2.5kHz, 6.3kHz, 16kHz

■ Low-frequency effect level LFE LEVEL

Use to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency

effect) channel according to the capacity of your

subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-

frequency special effects which are only added to certain

scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit

decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.

To access these parameters, select:

MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > LFE LEVEL

Choices: –20 to 0 (dB)

Speaker SPEAKER

Select to adjust the speaker LFE level.

Headphone HEADPHONE

Select to adjust the headphone LFE level.

Depending on the settings of LFE LEVEL, some signals may not

be output from the SUBWOOFER jack.

. UNIT;;;;;;meters

FRONTL;;;;2.30m

FRONTR;;;;2.30m

CENTER;;;;;2.00m

: Up/Down

: Adjust

-/+

C)SP

DISTANCE

Note

. CHANNEL;;FRONT L

63Hz 0dB

160Hz 0dB

400Hz 0dB

1kHz 0dB

2.5kHz 0dB

6.3kHz 0dB

16kHz 0dB

D)GRAPHIC

. SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB

HEADPHONE;;;;0dB

/ : Up/Down

-/+ : Adjust

E)LFE

LEVEL

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 51 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

SET MENU

■ Dynamic range DYNAMIC RANGE

Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression to

be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is

effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital and

DTS signals.

To access these parameters, select:

MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > DYNAMIC

RANGE >

Choices: MIN (minimum), STD (standard),

MAX (maximum)

Select to adjust the speaker compression.

Select to adjust the headphone compression.

• Select MAX for feature films.

• Select STD for general use.

• Select MIN for listening to sources at low volume

levels.

■ Low frequency test LOW FRQ. TEST

Use this feature to adjust the output level of the subwoofer

so it matches your other speakers.

To access these parameters, select:

MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU >

LOW FRQ. TEST >

1 Press j / i to set TEST TONE to ON, and

adjust the volume with VOL –/+ so you can

hear the tone.

Do not turn up the volume too high. If no test tone is

heard, turn down the volume, set this unit in the

standby mode and make sure all the necessary

connections are correct.

• The tone generator produces a narrow-band noise

centered on a specified frequency by the band pass

filter besides a wide-band noise.

2 Press d to go to “OUTPUT” and press j / i to

select the speaker you want to compare with

the subwoofer.

Choices: FRONT L/R, FRONT L, CENTER,

FRONT R, SUR.R, SBR*, SBL*, SUR.L, SWFR,

PRESENCE

* SB will be displayed if you selected only one surround

back speaker in SURR B L/R SP (page 49).

3 Press d to go to “FRQ” and press j / i to

select the frequency you want to use.

Choices: 35 to 250 (Hz), Initial: 88 Hz

4 Adjust the volume of the subwoofer with the

controls on the subwoofer so it matches that

of the speaker you are comparing it to.

You can use the test tone not only for adjusting the subwoofer

level, but also for checking the low-frequency characteristics of

your listening room. Low-frequency sounds are especially

affected by the listener’s position, speaker placement, subwoofer

polarity and other conditions.

. SP: MIN STD[MAX

HP: MIN STD[MAX

/ : Up/Down

-/+ : Adjust

F)DYNAMIC RANGE

/ : Up/Down

-/+ : Adjust

. TEST_TONE;;;;OFF

OUTPUT;FRONT L/R

FRQ;;;;;;;;;88Hz

G)LOW FRQ.TEST

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 52 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Headphone tone control HP TONE CTRL

Use to adjust the amount of bass and treble output to your

headphones.

To access these parameters, select:

MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > HP TONE CTRL

• Use BASS to adjust the headphone bass level.

• Use TRBL to adjust the headphone treble level.

Choices: –6 to +6 (dB), Initial: 0 dB

■ Audio set AUDIO SET

Use to customize this units overall audio settings.

To access these parameters, select:

MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > AUDIO SET

Mute MUTE

Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the

output volume.

Choices: MUTE, –20 dB

• Select MUTE to completely halt all output of sound.

•Select

–20 dB to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.

Delay DELAY

Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the

video image. This may be necessary when using certain

LCD monitors or projectors.

Choices: 0 to 240 (ms)

Dialog lift DIALG.LIFT

Use to turn on/off the DIALG.LIFT parameter (see

page 76). This parameter adjusts the height of the front

and center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.) by

assigning some of the front and center channel elements to

the presence speakers.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select ON to turn on DIALG.LIFT effect.

• Select OFF to turn off DIALG.LIFT effect.

DIALG.LIFT appears only when PRESENCE is set to YES

(see page 28).

■ Presence/surround back channel select

PR/SBch SELECT

You can select to prioritize either the surround back or

presence speakers when playing sources that contain

surround back channel signals using CINEMA DSP sound

field programs.

MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > PR/SBch SELECT

Choices: PRch, SBch

• Select SBch to use surround back speakers when a

surround back channel signal is detected in a CINEMA

DSP program. Presence channel signals will be output

from front speakers.

• Select PRch to use presence speakers even when

surround back channel signals are input. The signals

for the surround back channel will be output from

surround speakers.

Note

. BASS

TRBL

0dB

/ : Up/Down

-/+ : Adjust

H)HP TONE

CTRL

/ : Exit

-/+ : Select

. AUDIO MUTE;;MUTE

AUDIO DELAY;;0ms

DIALG.LIFT;;;OFF

I)AUDIO SET

/ : Exit

-/+ : Select

PRch [SBch

J)PR/SBch SELECT

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 53 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

SET MENU

■ Input/output assignment I/O ASSIGN

You can assign jacks according to the component to be

used if this unit’s initial settings do not correspond to your

needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the

respective jacks and effectively connect more

components.

Once the inputs have been reassigned, you can select the

corresponding component by using INPUT on the front

panel or the input selector buttons on the remote control.

MANUAL SETUP > INPUT MENU > I/O ASSIGN >

The default settings are displayed with parentheses on the OSD.

CMPNT-V IN for COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT

jacks [A] and [B]

Choices: DVD, V-AUX, DVR/VCR 2, VCR 1, CBL/SAT,

DTV, CD-R

OPTICAL OUT for OPTICAL OUTPUT jacks (1)

and (2)

Choices: MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, V-AUX,

DVR/VCR 2, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, DTV, DVD

OPTICAL IN for OPTICAL INPUT jacks (3), (4), (5)

and (6)

Choices: CD, PHONO, DVR/VCR 2, VCR 1, CBL/SAT,

DTV, DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R

COAXIAL IN for COAXIAL INPUT jacks (7), (8) and

(9)

Choices: CD, PHONO, V-AUX, DVR/VCR 2, VCR 1,

CBL/SAT, DTV, DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R

• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same

type of jack.

• When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and

OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the

COAXIAL jack.

■ Input mode INPUT MODE

Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources

connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn

on this unit (see page 34 for details about the input mode).

MANUAL SETUP > INPUT MENU > INPUT MODE >

Choices: AUTO, LAST

• Select AUTO to allow this unit to automatically detect

the type of input signal and select the appropriate input

mode.

• Select LAST to set this unit to automatically select the

last input mode used for that source.

Even if LAST is selected, the last setting for the EX/ES button

will not be recalled.

Manual setup: INPUT

. A)I/OASSIGNMENT

B)INPUTMODE

C)INPUTRENAME

D)EXT.INPUT

: Up/Down

: Select

-/+

3 INPUT

. [A];;;;; DVD

( DVD )

[B];;;;; DTV

(DTV)

CMPNT-V

INPUT

. (1);;;;;MD/TAPE

(MD/TAPE )

(2);;;;; CD-R

(CD-R)

OPTICAL

OUT

Notes

Note

. (3);;;;; CD

(CD)

(4);;;;; DVD

(DVD )

(5);;;;; DTV

(DTV )

OPTICAL

. (7);;;;; CD

(CD)

(8);;;;; DVD

(DVD )

(9);;;;;DVR/VCR2

(DVR/VCR2)

COAXIAL

/ : Exit

-/+ : Select

AUTO [LAST

B)INPUT MODE

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 54 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Input rename INPUT RENAME

Use this feature to change the name of the inputs on the

OSD and front panel display.

MANUAL SETUP > INPUT MENU > INPUT RENAME

1 Press an input selector button to select the

input you want to change the name of.

2 Press j / i to place the _ (under-bar) under

the space or the character you want to edit.

3 Press u / d to select the character you want

to use and j / i to move to the next one.

• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.

• Press d to change the character in the following

order, or press u to go in the reverse order:

A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, #, *,

+, etc.

• Repeat steps 1 to 3 to rename each input.

4 Press i repeatedly to exit from INPUT

RENAME.

■ External input EXT.INPUT

Use this feature to set the direction of the signals input

into the center, subwoofer and surround channels when

the source component is connected to the MULTI CH

INPUT jacks. If you are inputting 8-channel signals from

an external decoder, use this feature to select jacks for the

additional front signals.

MANUAL SETUP > INPUT MENU > EXT.INPUT >

6ch/8ch

This setting is used to select the number of channels input

from an external decoder.

Choices: 6ch

, 8ch

FRONT

If you selected 8ch, you can select analog audio jacks to

which front signals from an external decoder will be input.

Choices: DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2,

MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, V-AUX

CENTER

Use to select where the signals input to the CENTER jack

will be output.

Choices: CENTER, FRONT

• Select CENTER to output the signals from the center

speaker.

• Select FRONT to output the signals from the front left

and right speakers.

SWFR

Use to select where the signals input to the SUBWOOFER

jack will be output.

Choices: SWFR, FRONT

• Select SWFR to output the signals from the subwoofer.

• Select FRONT to output the signals from the front left

and right speakers.

SL/SR

Use to select where the signals input to the SURROUND

jacks will be output.

Choices: SL/SR, FRONT

• Select SL/SR to output the signals from the surround

speakers.

• Select FRONT to output the signals from the front left

and right speakers.

-/+ : Position

/ : Character

CD -> CD

C)INPUT RENAME

.[6CH 8CH

(FRNT/SB-> FRNT)

CENTER ->CENTER

SWFR -> SWFR

SL/SR -> SL/SR

( --- -> SB )

-/+ Select

/ : Up/Down

D)EXT.INPUT

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 55 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

SET MENU

■ Display set DISPLAY SET

MANUAL SETUP > OPTION MENU > DISPLAY SET >

Dimmer DIMMER

Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display.

Choices: –4 to 0

OSD shift OSD SHIFT

Use to adjust the vertical position of the OSD.

Choices: +5 (downward) to –5 (upward)

• Press + to lower the position of the OSD.

• Press – to raise the position of the OSD.

Gray back GRAY BACK

Selecting AUTO for the on-screen display setting displays

a gray background when there’s no video signal input.

Nothing is displayed if OFF is selected.

Choices: AUTO, OFF

If “GRAY BACK” is set to OFF, no information will be

displayed on the screen when video signals are not being input.

Video conversion V CONV.

Use this feature to turn on/off the conversion of composite

signals to both S-video and component signals. This

allows you to output coverted video signals from the S-

video jack or the component video jack when no S-video

or component signals are input. This feature also converts

S-video signals to component signals when no component

signals are input.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select OFF not to convert any signals.

• Select ON to convert composite signals to S-video and

component signals, and to convert S-video signals to

component signals.

• Converted video signals are only output to the MONITOR OUT

jacks. When recording you must make the same type of video

connections (composite or S-video) between each component.

• When converting S-video signals from a VCR to component

video signals, the picture quality may suffer depending on your

VCR.

Component OSD CMPNT OSD

Use this feature to turn on/off OSD output to the

COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks when

using the set menu, test tone or parameter functions.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select ON to output the OSD signals from

COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.

• Select OFF if you do not want to output the OSD

signals from COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT

jacks.

Set menu functions even when OFF is selected.

■ Memory guard MEMORY GUARD

Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP

program parameter values and other system settings.

MANUAL SETUP > OPTION MENU > MEMORY

GUARD >

Choices: ON, OFF

Select ON to protect:

• DSP program parameters

• All SET MENU items

• All speaker levels

• The on-screen display (OSD) mode

When MEMORY GUARD is set to ON, you cannot use

the test tone or select any other SET MENU items.

Manual setup: OPTION

Note

. A)DISPLAYSET

B)MEMORYGUARD

C)PARAM.INI

D)ZONESET

: Up/Down

: Select

-/+

OPTION

/ : Up/Down

-/+ : Select

. DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0

OSD SHIFT;;;;;;0

GRAY BACK;;;AUTO

V CONV.;;;;;;;ON

CMPNT OSD;;;;OFF

A)DISPLAY SET

Notes

Note

/ : Exit

-/+ : Select

[OFF ON

B)MEMORY GUARD

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 56 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

SET MENU

ADVANCED

OPERATION

■ Parameter initialization PARAM. INI

Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each sound

field

program within a sound field program group. When

you initialize a sound

field program group, all of the

parameter values within that group revert to their initial

settings.

MANUAL SETUP > OPTION MENU > PARAM. INI >

Press the corresponding numeric button for the sound

field

program that you want to initialize.

An asterisk (*) next to a program number means that the

parameter values have been changed from their initial

settings.

• You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter

settings once you initialize a

sound field program group.

• You cannot separately initialize individual

sound field

programs.

• You cannot initialize any program groups when MEMORY

GUARD is set to ON.

■ Speaker impedance setting SP IMP.SET

Use to select the impedance of your speakers.

MANUAL SETUP > OPTION MENU > SP IMP.SET >

Choices: 6ohms, 8ohms

■ Zone set ZONE SET

Use to specify the location of speakers connected the

SPEAKERS B terminals.

MANUAL SETUP > OPTION MENU > ZONE SET >

SP B

Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers

connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.

Choices: FRONT, ZONE B

• Select FRONT to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B

when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B

terminals are set in the main room.

• Select ZONE B if the speakers connected to the

SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another room. If

SPEAKERS A is turned OFF and SPEAKERS B is

turned ON, all the speakers including the subwoofer in

the main room are muted and the unit outputs sound

from SPEAKERS B only.

• If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack on the unit, the

sound is output from both headphones and SPEAKERS B.

• When a DSP program is selected, the unit automatically enters

the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode.

Notes

123*4

*5678

9 *0 +10

C)PARAM. INI

/ : Exit

-/+ : Select

Minimum 8ohms

D)SP IMP.SET

Notes

/ : Exit

-/+ : Select

SP_B;;;;;;FRONT

E)ZONE SET

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 57 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

SET MENU

■ Zone 2 set ZONE2 SET

(U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only)

MANUAL SETUP > OPTION MENU > ZONE2 SET >

Output volume OUTPUT VOL

Use to select how the volume control will operate with

regard to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks.

Choices: VAR., FIX

• Select VAR. to adjust the ZONE 2 volume using the

remote control.

• Select FIX to fix the ZONE 2 OUTPUT volume level

to a standard line level.

Zone 2 amplifier ZONE2 AMP

Use to select how the ZONE 2 speakers will be amplified.

Choices: ON, OFF

• Select OFF if you do not use Zone 2 speakers or if you

connect your Zone 2 speakers through an external

amplifiers connected to this unit’s ZONE 2 OUTPUT

jacks.

• Select ON to use this unit’s internal amplifier if you

connect your Zone 2 speakers directly to this unit’s

PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals.

/ : Up/Down

-/+ : Select

OUTPUT VOL;;VAR.

ZONE2 AMP;;;OFF

F)ZONE2 SET

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 58 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

ADVANCED

OPERATION

In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other A/V components made by YAMAHA and

other manufacturers. To control other components, you must set up remote control with the appropriate manufacturer

codes.

This remote control also has a learn feature which allows the remote to acquire functions from other remote controls

equipped with an infrared remote control transmitter.

■ Controlling this unit

The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit

when the AMP mode is selected. Press AMP to select the

AMP mode.

You can set the remote so that the shaded areas always control

this unit. This is useful, for example, if you always want to use

the numeric buttons to select this unit’s sound fields instead of for

controlling the selected component (DVD, CD, MD, etc.). To

activate this mode, hold down AMP for at least 3 seconds so that

“A:__” (i.e., “A:DVD”) appears in the display window. To

cancel, repeat so that only the selected component (i.e., “DVD”)

is displayed.

■ Controlling other components

The shaded areas below can be used to control other

components. Each button has a different function

depending on the selected components. Select the

component you want to control by pressing an input

selector button or SELECT k/n. The name of the selected

component appears in the display window.

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

Control area

MUSIC TV THTR

EX/ES

PHONO

POWER SLEEP

CLEAR

LEARN

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

RE–NAME

INPUT MODE

SYSTEM

AUX

DTV

POWER

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOL

LEVEL

STRAIGHT

STEREO

ENTERTAIN

NIGHT

MOVIE

/DTS

TEST

ON SCREEN

EFFECT

CHP/INDEX

TV VOL

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

HALL

CHCH

JAZZ

ROCK

TITLE

MUTE

POWER

AMP

AVTV

DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

SELECT

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER

MULTI CH IN

–

3421

+10 ENTER

67 8

MUSIC

VIDEO

THEATER

EX/ES

PHONO

POWER SLEEP

CLEAR

LEARN

STANDBY

TRANSMIT

RE–NAME

INPUT MODE

SYSTEM

AUX

DTV

POWER

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

VOL

LEVEL

STEREO

HALL

ENTER-

TAINMENT

SELECT

MOVIE

THEATER 1

MOVIE

THEATER 2

/DTS

SUR.

TEST

ON SCREEN

EFFECT

CHP/INDEX

TV VOL

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

CHURCH

CHCH

JAZZ CLUB

ROCK

CONCERT

TITLE

MUTE

POWER

AMP

AVTV

DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD

SELECT

CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R

TUNER

MULTI CH IN

–

3421

910

11 12

67 8

POWER

REC

DISC SKIP

SET MENU

TV INPUT

A/B/C/D/E

AUDIO

LEVEL

STEREO

ENTERTAIN

NIGHT

MOVIE

THX /DTS

TEST

ON SCREEN

CHP/INDEX

TV VOL

RETURN

DISPLAY

PRESET PRESET

TV MUTE

TV VOL

SELECT

HALL

CHCH

JAZZ

ROCK

TITLE

POWER

AVTV

–

3421

+10 ENTER

67 8

MUSIC TV THTR

EX/ES

Input selector buttons

switch the component

control area.

Component

control area

You can control up to 11

different components by

setting appropriate

manufacturer codes (see

page 64).

00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 59 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM

REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES

You can control other components by setting the

appropriate manufacturer codes. Codes can be set up for

each input area.

The following table shows the factory preset component

(Library: component category) and the manufacturer code

for each area.

You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even

if a YAMAHA manufacturer code is initially set as listed above.

In this case, try to set other YAMAHA manufacturer code(s).

1 Press an input selector button to select the

source component you want to set up.

2 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds

using a ballpoint pen or similar object.

“SETUP” and the selected component name appear

alternately in the display window.

Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3

seconds, otherwise the learning process will start.

Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds.

Otherwise, the learning mode will be automatically

canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.

If you want to change a library (component

category), press j / i. You can set a different

type of component.

Library choices: L:DVD, L:LD, L:CD, L:CDR,

L:MD, L:TAP (tape), L:TUN, L:AMP*, L:TV,

L:CAB (cable), L:DBS, L:SAT, L:VCR

* The amplifier Library (L:AMP) code is preset to “YPC”

to operate this unit. However, you can switch between the

following two codes if necessary.

• The initial setting for “Amplifier library” is “YPC”.

YPC To operate this unit.

ZONE (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only)

To operate ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 features.

3 Press u / d to select the name of your

component’s manufacturer.

You will find the names of most worldwide audio-

video manufacturers in alphabetical order in the

display window.

4 Press one of the buttons shaded below to

see if you can control your component. If you

can, the manufacturer code is correct.

• If the manufacturer of your component has more than one

codes, try each of them until you find the correct one.

• If you continuously want to set up another code for

another component, press TV MUTE/SELECT and repeat

steps 1, 3 and 4.

Setting manufacturer codes

Input area

Component

Documenttranscriptie

HTR-5790U-cv.fm Page 1 Tuesday, November 18, 2003 11:12 AM U HTR-5790 AV Receiver ©2003 YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. Printed in Malaysia WC85700 OWNER'S MANUAL 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 2 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 10 CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 i 11 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated. Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions should be followed. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for cleaning. Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water – for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like. Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer. A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn. 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to. Power Sources – This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product. Lightning – For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges. Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged, b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product, c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water, 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 3 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS d) 20 21 22 23 If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation, e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance - this indicates a need for service. Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. Heat – The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE FCC INFORMATION (for US customers) 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. ii 3 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 4 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place — away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in a environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign object may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cord from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the power cord from the wall outlet during an electrical storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 18 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/230-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association's Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion - and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. iii 4 Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 1 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM CONTENTS CONTENTS ............................................................ 1 FEATURES............................................................. 2 GETTING STARTED............................................ 3 Supplied accessories .................................................. 3 Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS...............................................41 For movie/video sources.......................................... 41 For music sources .................................................... 43 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4 PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP ............................................... 11 ADVANCED OPERATIONS ..............................44 Selecting the OSD mode.......................................... 44 Using the sleep timer ............................................... 44 Manually adjusting speaker levels........................... 45 Using the test tone ................................................... 46 SET MENU ............................................................47 Using SET MENU................................................... 48 Manual setup: SOUND............................................ 49 Manual setup: INPUT.............................................. 54 Manual setup: OPTION........................................... 56 CONNECTIONS .................................................. 15 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................59 Before connecting components................................ 15 Connecting video components................................. 16 Connecting audio components................................. 19 Connecting the antennas .......................................... 21 Connecting the power supply cord .......................... 22 Speaker impedance setting ...................................... 23 Turning on the power............................................... 23 Control area ............................................................. 59 Setting manufacturer codes...................................... 60 Programming codes from other remote controls ..... 61 Changing source names in the display window....... 62 Clearing function sets .............................................. 63 Clearing individual functions .................................. 63 Controlling each component.................................... 64 Introduction.............................................................. 24 Optimizer microphone setup.................................... 24 Starting the setup ..................................................... 25 BASIC SETUP ...................................................... 28 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS AUTO SETUP....................................................... 24 BASIC OPERATION Speaker placement ................................................... 11 Speaker connections ................................................ 12 ADVANCED OPERATION PREPARATION Front panel ................................................................. 4 Remote control........................................................... 6 Using the remote control ........................................... 7 Front panel display .................................................... 8 Rear panel ................................................................ 10 ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) ..68 Zone 2/Zone 3 connections...................................... 68 Remote controlling Zone 2/Zone 3.......................... 69 Using BASIC setup.................................................. 28 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION BASIC OPERATION Basic operations....................................................... 30 Selecting sound field programs ............................... 32 Selecting input modes.............................................. 34 TUNING ................................................................ 36 Automatic and manual tuning.................................. 36 Presetting stations .................................................... 37 Selecting preset stations........................................... 39 Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 39 What is a sound field ............................................... 71 Changing parameter settings ................................... 71 ADVANCED OPERATION PLAYBACK.......................................................... 30 EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS ......71 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS...............................................73 TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................77 GLOSSARY...........................................................82 SPECIFICATIONS...............................................85 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION RECORDING ....................................................... 40 1 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 2 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM FEATURES FEATURES Built-in 7-channel power amplifier Other features ◆ Minimum RMS output power (0.04% THD, 20 Hz – 20 kHz, 8Ω) Front: 110 W + 110 W Center: 110 W Surround: 110 W + 110 W Surround Back: 110 W + 110 W ◆ YPAO: YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer for automatic speaker setup ◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ “SET MENU” which provides you with items for optimizing this unit for your audio/video system ◆ 6 or 8-channel external decoder input for other future formats ◆ On Screen Display function helpful in controlling this unit ◆ S Video signal input/output capability ◆ Component video input/output capability ◆ Video signal conversion (composite video ↔ S Video → component video) capability for monitor out ◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ◆ Sleep timer ◆ Night listening mode ◆ Remote control with preset manufacturer codes ◆ Zone 2/Zone 3 custom installation facility (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) Sound field features ◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of sound fields ◆ THX ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder ◆ DTS/DTS ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6 decoder, DTS 96/24 ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx Decoder ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA™ Sophisticated AM/FM tuner ◆ 40-station random access preset tuning ◆ Automatic preset tuning ◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing) • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. “DTS” and “DTS-ES Digital Surround” and “Neo:6” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. SILENT CINEMA is a trademark of YAMAHA CORPORATION. THX and the THX logo are registered trademarks of THX Ltd. Surround EX is a jointly developed technology of THX and Dolby Laboratories, Inc. and is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved. Used under authorization. 2 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 3 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM GETTING STARTED GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Supplied accessories Please check that you received all of the following parts. Batteries (4) (AAA, R03, UM-4) Remote control TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR Power Cord (U.S.A., Canada and Europe models) AM loop antenna LEARN SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD SELECT POWER POWER TV AV AMP REC AUDIO DISC SKIP + Speaker terminal wrench 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only) VOL Indoor FM antenna (U.S.A., Canada, China, Korea, Asia and General models) – LEVEL TITLE SET MENU + MUTE MENU TV VOL A/B/C/D/E TV INPUT CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TEST ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN – DISPLAY STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 EFFECT THX 9 /DTS 0 ROCK Optimizer microphone* 8 NIGHT EX/ES +10 ENTER * CHP/INDEX The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. – Keep it away from direct sunlight. – Do not place it on top of this unit. Installing batteries in the remote control 2 1 3 (U.K., Europe and Australia models) Notes on batteries • Change all of the batteries if you notice the condition like; the operation range of the remote control decreases, the indicator does not flash or its light becomes dim. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. If the remote control is without batteries for more than 3 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the manufacturer code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. 1 Press the part and slide the battery compartment cover off. 2 Insert four supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM4) according to the polarity markings on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place. 3 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 4 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel (U.S.A. model) VOLUME STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING OPTIMIZER MIC FM/AM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING EDIT PROGRAM PHONES MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO INPUT SPEAKERS A VIDEO AUX B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT SILENT CINEMA 1 STANDBY/ON Turns on this unit or sets it to the standby mode. When you turn on this unit, you will hear a click and there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. Note In standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared-signals from the remote control. 2 Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote control. 3 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit. 4 PRESET/TUNING EDIT Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h between selecting preset station numbers and tuning. 5 FM/AM Switches the reception band between FM and AM. 6 A/B/C/D/E Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E). 4 S VIDEO VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL 7 PRESET/TUNING l / h Selects preset station number 1 to 8 when the colon (:) is displayed next to the band indication in the front panel display. Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) is not displayed. 8 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Stores a station in the memory. Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning. 9 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) Switches the tuning mode between automatic (“AUTO” indicator on) and manual (“AUTO” indicator off). 0 VOLUME Controls the output level of all audio channels. This does not affect the REC OUT level. A OPTIMIZER MIC jack Use to connect and input audio signals from the supplied microphone for use with the AUTO SETUP function (see page 24). 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 5 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS INTRODUCTION B PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) Outputs audio signals for private listening with headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals are output to the OUTPUT jacks or to the speakers. All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the left and right headphone channels. C SPEAKERS A/B Turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A and/or B terminals on the rear panel at each time the corresponding button is pressed. D STRAIGHT/EFFECT Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing. E PROGRAM Use to select sound field programs or adjust bass/treble balance (in conjunction with TONE CONTROL). F TONE CONTROL Use to adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left/right and center channels (see page 31). G INPUT MODE Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of signals received when one component is connected to two or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 34). Priority cannot be set when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. H INPUT selector Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch. I MULTI CH INPUT Selects the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. When selected, the MULTI CH INPUT source takes priority over the source selected with INPUT (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). J VIDEO AUX jacks Input audio and video signals from a portable external source such as a game console. To reproduce source signals from these jacks, select V-AUX as the input source. 5 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 6 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote control This section describes the function of each control on the remote control. See “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on page 59 to operate other components with this remote control. TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR LEARN 4 SYSTEM POWER Turns on the power of this unit. 5 Input selector buttons Select the input source and change the control area. 6 Display window Shows the name of the selected source component that you can control. SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD SELECT POWER POWER TV AV AMP REC AUDIO DISC SKIP + VOL – LEVEL TITLE SET MENU + MUTE MENU TV VOL TV INPUT CH – A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TEST ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN – DISPLAY STEREO HALL JAZZ ROCK 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES +10 ENTER EFFECT THX 9 /DTS 0 CHP/INDEX 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. 2 TRANSMIT indicator Flashes while the remote control is sending signals. 3 STANDBY Sets this unit in the standby mode. 6 7 LEVEL Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the level. 8 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i Use to select and adjust DSP program parameters or SET MENU items. 9 TEST Outputs the test tone to adjust the speaker levels. 0 Sound field program/Numeric buttons Use to select sound field programs or input numbers. A RE-NAME Used for changing the input source name in the display window (see page 62). B CLEAR Used for clearing functions acquired when using the learn and rename features, or setting manufacturer codes (see page 63). C LEARN Used for setting up the manufacturer code or for programming functions from other remote controls (see pages 60 and 61). D SLEEP Sets the sleep timer. E INPUT MODE Sets the priority (AUTO, DTS, ANALOG) for the type of signals received when one component is connected to two or more of this unit’s input jacks (see page 34). Priority cannot be set when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. F MULTI CH IN Selects the MULTI CH INPUT mode when using an external decoder (etc.). G SELECT k/n Selects another component that you can control independently of the input component selected with the input selector buttons. H AMP Selects AMP or other component selected by the input selector button. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 7 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS I VOL –/+ Increases or decreases the volume level. VOLUME STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING OPTIMIZER MIC FM/AM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING EDIT PROGRAM K SET MENU Selects the SET MENU mode. L ON SCREEN Selects the on-screen display (OSD) mode for your video monitor. INTRODUCTION J MUTE Mutes the sound. The MUTE indicator turns on when the MUTE function is on. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level. Using the remote control PHONES MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO INPUT SPEAKERS A VIDEO AUX B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT S VIDEO SILENT CINEMA 30 30 L AUDIO R OPTICAL Approximately 6 m (20 ft) RE–NAME CLEAR LEARN TRANSMIT SYSTEM POWER VIDEO STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE CD MULTI CH IN PHONO TUNER V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 CD-R DVD SELECT POWER POWER TV AV AMP REC AUDIO M STRAIGHT/EFFECT Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing. N EX/ES Switches between 5.1 or 6.1/7.1 channel playback of multi-channel software. DISC SKIP VOL LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MUTE MENU TV VOL TV INPUT CH A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH PRESET TEST ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN DISPLAY EFFECT STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR 5 THX 9 6 /DTS 0 7 NIGHT +10 ROCK 4 MOVIE 8 EX/ES ENTER CHP/INDEX The remote control transmits a directional infrared beam. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on the main unit during operation. ■ Handling the remote control • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – high humidity such as near a bath – high temperature such as near a heater or stove – extremely low temperature – dusty places 7 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 8 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel display V–AUX DVR/VCR2 MATRIX DISCRETE EX NIGHT DIGITAL SILENT PL PL SP THX PCM AB 96 24 VCR 1 VIRTUAL CBL/SAT DTV DVD ZONE2 ZONE3 SLEEP 1 Decoder indicators When any of this unit’s decoders function, the respective indicator lights up. 2 Sound field indicators Light to indicate the active DSP sound fields. Presence DSP sound field Listening position Left surround DSP sound field Right surround DSP sound field Surround back DSP sound field 3 Input source indicators A cursor lights to show the current input source. 4 CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program. 5 OPTIMIZER indicator Lights up during the auto setup procedure and when the auto setup speaker settings are used without any modifications. 6 STEREO indicator Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an FM stereo broadcast while the “AUTO” indicator is lit. 7 AUTO indicator Shows that this unit is in the automatic tuning mode. 8 MUTE indicator Lights up while the MUTE function is on. 8 CD–R CD TUNER PHONO PS PTY RT CT STEREO AUTO MUTE VOLUME EON PTY HOLD TUNED MEMORY ft mS dB (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) 9 VOLUME level indicators Indicate the volume level. MD/TAPE OPTIMIZER HiFi DSP 96/24 L C R LFE SL SB SR (U.K. and Europe models only) 0 THX indicator Lights up when a THX program is selected. A PCM indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code modulation) digital audio signals. B Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected. C SP A B indicators Light up according to the set of front speakers selected. Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are selected, or when bi-wiring. D SILENT CINEMA indicator Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field program is selected (see page 31). E NIGHT indicator Lights up when you select night listening mode. F VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see page 34). G SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on. H Multi-information display Shows the current sound field program name and other information when adjusting or changing settings. I HiFi DSP Lights when you select a HiFi DSP sound field program. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 9 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS J TUNED indicator Lights up when this unit is tuned in to a station. INTRODUCTION K MEMORY indicator Flashes to show a station can be stored. L 96/24 indicator Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit. M LFE indicator Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal. N Input channel indicators Indicate the channel components of current digital input signal. O Presence and surround back speaker indicators Indicate the connection of presence and/or surround back speakers when using the SPEAKERS setting (page 29) or SP LEVEL setting (page 50). P ZONE 2/ZONE 3 indicators (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) Light up while Zone 2 or Zone 3 signal is output. Q RDS indicators (U.K. and Europe models only) The name(s) of the RDS data offered by the currently received RDS station light(s) up. EON lights up when an RDS station that offers the EON data service is being received. PTY HOLD lights up while searching for stations in the PTY SEEK mode. 9 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 10 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Rear panel AUDIO DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL AUDIO L R VIDEO VIDEO L R IN DVD IN (PLAY) CD-R REMOTE COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y S VIDEO MD/TAPE CONTROL OUT OUT DVD +12V 15mA MAX. MD/TAPE DTV OUT (REC) DTV IN (PLAY) CBL /SAT R + – A – + + – B – + L DIGITAL INPUT CD DVD FRONT CD-R MONITOR OUT OUT (REC) IN VCR 1 DTV AC OUTLETS L R GND CBL/SAT PHONO SURROUND FRONT IN COAXIAL R R FM ANT 75Ω UNBAL. DVR/ VCR 2 FRONT (6CH)/SB (8CH) + AM ANT OUT CD CENTER – TUNER + – – + L L R L SURROUND CD OUT ZONE 2 SURROUND + CD-R SUB WOOFER DVD R DVR/ VCR 2 SURROUND BACK /PRESENCE SUB WOOFER CENTER MULTI CH INPUT ZONE 3 – – + L PRE OUT GND + CENTER R L – SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS SINGLE PRESENCE/ ZONE 2 MONITOR OUT OUTPUT (U.S.A. model) 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks See page 19 for details. 2 Audio component jacks See page 19 for connection information. 3 Video component jacks See pages 16 and 18 for connection information. 4 REMOTE IN/OUT jacks (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) See page 69 for details. 5 CONTROL OUT jack (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) This is control expansion terminal for commercial use. 6 AC OUTLET(S) Use to supply power to your other A/V components (see page 22). 7 AC INLET (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Use this inlet to plug in the supplied power cable (see page 22). 8 DIGITAL INPUT jacks See pages 16, 18 and 19 for details. 9 MULTI CH INPUT jacks See page 17 for connection information. 10 0 ZONE 2 / ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) See page 68 for details. A Antenna terminals See page 21 for connection information. B PRE OUT jacks See page 20 for connection information. C Speaker terminals See page 12 for connection information. D PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models) PRESENCE speaker terminals (other models) See page 12 for connection information. < Asia and General models only > FREQUENCY STEP switch See page 21. VOLTAGE SELECTOR See page 22. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 11 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SPEAKER SETUP + SPEAKER SETUP Surround back speakers (SBR and SBL) Speaker placement PL PR FL FR C The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide for more realistic front-to-back transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the listening position and at the same height as the surround speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm (12 in) apart. Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width as the front speakers. 30˚ SL SR 60˚ SL 80˚ SBL SR SBR more than 30 cm (12 inches) y The speaker layout above shows the standard ITU-R speaker setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP, multi-channel audio sources and THX. 1.8 m (6 ft) 1.8 m (6 ft) The use of a subwoofer, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity reproduction of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS software. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. Presence speakers (PR and PL) Presence speakers supplement the sound from the front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by CINEMA DSP (see page 41). These effects include sounds that filmmakers intend to locate a little farther back behind the screen in order to create more theater-like ambience. Place these speakers at the front of the room about 0.5 - 1 m (1 - 3 ft) outside the front speakers, facing slightly inwards, and about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor. ■ Di-pole speaker layout Front speakers (FR and FL) The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. Either di-pole or direct radiating speaker types can be used for THX surround. If you choose di-pole speakers, please place the surround and surround back speakers according to the speaker layout below. FL FR C Center speaker (C) The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face of your video monitor. Place the speaker centrally between the front speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under it. Surround speakers (SR and SL) The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor. SL SR 30˚ 30˚ SBL SBR : Di-pole speaker : Direction of di-pole speaker 11 PREPARATION Subwoofer 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 12 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SPEAKER SETUP Speaker connections 5 Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. • • • • CAUTION If you will use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set this unit’s speaker impedance setting to 6 ohms before using (see page 23). Before connecting the speakers, make sure that the power of this unit is off. Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals on this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. 10 mm (3/8") 1 2 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. 5 4 3 Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) Connecting to PRESENCE/ZONE 2 or PRESENCE speaker terminals 1 Open the tab. 1 2 Insert one bare wire into the hole of each terminal. 3 Return the tab to secure the wire. 3 2 Banana plug connections (With the exception of U.K., Europe and Asia models) First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. Banana plug 1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8") of insulation from the end of each speaker cables. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. 3 Unscrew the knob. y Supplied speaker terminal wrench is useful to screw or unscrew knobs. 4 12 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of each terminal. (With the exception of U.K., Europe and Asia models) 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 13 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SPEAKER SETUP 9 10 4 2 1 7 3 8 6 Front speakers (A) Right Left 5 Subwoofer system Center speaker Speaker layout 2 R 4 3 + FRONT + – A – + – B – + PREPARATION 1 Front speakers (B) L CENTER – + AC OUTLETS SURROUND R + – – + L L R + SUB WOOFER R + – – + L – SURROUND BACK SINGLE PRESENCE/ ZONE 2 SPEAKERS PRE OUT (U.S.A. model) 7 8 Right Left Surround speakers 5 6 Right Left Surround back speakers 9 10 Right Left Presence speakers You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, but they do not output sound simultaneously. • The surround back speakers output the surround back channel included in Dolby Digital EX and DTS ES software and only operate when the Dolby Digital EX or DTS ES decoder is turned on. • The presence speakers output ambient effects created by the DSP sound fields. They do not output sound when other sound fields are selected. 13 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 14 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SPEAKER SETUP ■ FRONT terminals ■ CENTER terminals Connect one or two speaker systems to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either the FRONT A or B terminals. Connect a center speaker to these terminals. Note ■ SUBWOOFER jack The Canada model cannot output to two separate speaker systems simultaneously. Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, to this jack. Bi-wired connection The unit also allows you to make bi-wired connections to one speaker system. Use two pairs of speaker cables for each speaker (one pair for the woofer and one pair for the tweeter/ mid-range). To use the bi-wired connections, press SPEAKERS A and SPEAKERS B on the front panel so that both SP A and B light up on the front panel display. Bi-wired connection ■ SURROUND terminals Connect surround speakers to these terminals. ■ SURROUND BACK terminals Connect surround back speakers to these terminals. If you only connect one surround back speaker, connect it to the left (L) terminals. ■ PRESENCE terminals Connect presence speakers to these terminals. * + – A – + FRONT + – B – + R This unit 14 L If you are using either U.S.A., Canada or Australia model, you can also use these speakers as Zone 2 speakers (see page 57). 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 15 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS Before connecting components CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains power until all connections between components are complete. Dust protection cap Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This cap protects the jack from dust. audio signal direction ■ Video jacks video signal direction This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection depends on the availability of input jacks on your monitor. The signals input through the VIDEO jack on this unit can be output through the S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks (see page 56). The signals input through the S VIDEO jack can be output through the VIDEO jack when V CONV. is set to ON (see page 56). For analog signals left analog cables L right analog cables R For digital signals optical cables O coaxial cables C For video signals video cables V S-video cables S V V ■ Analog jacks V You can input analog signals from audio components by connecting audio pin cable to the analog jacks on this unit. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. ■ Digital jacks This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals. VIDEO S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y VIDEO jack For conventional composite video signals. S VIDEO jack For S-video signals, separated into luminance (Y) and color (C) video signals to achieve high-quality color reproduction. COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For component signals, separated into luminance (Y) and color difference (PB, PR) to provide the best quality in picture reproduction. Note When signals are input through both the S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, signals input through the S VIDEO jack have priority. Note This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus audio signals input to the analog jacks are only output to the analog OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise audio signals input to the digital (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are only output to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks. 15 PREPARATION ■ Signal directions and cable indications 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 16 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM CONNECTIONS Connecting video components ■ Connections for DVD playback Optical out Video out DVD player Audio out R O L AUDIO DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL R AUDIO L VIDEO VIDEO L R DVD IN (PLAY) CD-R COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y S VIDEO MD/TAPE DVD MD/TAPE DTV OUT (REC) DTV IN (PLAY) CBL /SAT DIGITAL INPUT Video in CD DVD CD-R MONITOR OUT OUT (REC) IN TUNER VCR 1 AM ANT OUT CD M GND CBL/SAT PHONO IN COAXIAL DVR/ VCR 2 MAIN/SURROUND BACK FM ANT SUR CD OUT ZONE 2 SURROUND 75Ω UNBAL. CD-R SUB WOO DVD DTV SUB WOOFER GND CENTER MULCH CH INPUT ZONE 3 MONITOR OUT OUTPUT (U.S.A. model) 16 Video monitor 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 17 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-disc player, external decoder, sound processor or preamplifier. If you set EXT.INPUT 6ch/8ch to “8ch” (see page 55), you can use input jacks assigned in EXT.INPUT FRONT (page 55) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8 channels. Connect the output jacks on your multi-disc player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels. For 6-channel input For 8-channel input AUDIO R SURROUND SURROUND IN (PLAY) AUDIO L R L DVD MD/TAPE DTV SUB WOOFER SUB WOOFER CENTER IN (PLAY) CENTER CBL /SAT MULTI CH INPUT MULTI CH INPUT CD-R IN VCR 1 R L Subwoofer out R L R L Center out Center out Front out Multi-disc player/ External decoder Surround out Subwoofer out Surround back out R L CD Surround out Multi-disc player/ External decoder IN DVR/ VCR 2 R L Front out . Notes • When you select MULTI CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs. • This unit does not redirect signals input to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature. • When headphones are used, only front L/R channels are output. 17 PREPARATION FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH) FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH) 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 18 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM CONNECTIONS ■ Connections for other video components Optical out Video out Cable TV or satellite tuner Audio out R O L AUDIO DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL AUDIO L R VIDEO VIDEO L R COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y S VIDEO MD/TAPE DVD IN (PLAY) CD-R DVD MD/TAPE DTV OUT (REC) DTV IN (PLAY) CBL /SAT DIGITAL INPUT CD CD-R CD-R MONITOR OUT OUT (REC) IN TUNER VCR 1 DVD AM ANT OUT CD MA GND CBL/SAT PHONO IN COAXIAL DVR/ VCR 2 MAIN/SURROUND BACK FM ANT SURR CD OUT ZONE 2 SURROUND 75Ω UNBAL. CD-R SUB WOOF DVD DVR/ VCR2 SUB WOOFER GND ZONE 3 CENTER MULCH CH INPUT Connect a YAMAHA CD recorder that outputs OSD signals. MONITOR OUT OUTPUT (U.S.A. model) C R L R L Audio in Video in DVD recorder or VCR Audio out Video out Coaxial out ■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) Use these jacks to connect any video source, such as a game console or camcorder, to this unit. S VIDEO VIDEO S V L AUDIO R OPTICAL VIDEO AUX L R O Optical out Audio out R Audio out L Video out S video out 18 Game console or video camera 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 19 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM CONNECTIONS Connecting audio components ■ Connections for audio components Optical in MD recorder or tape deck Audio out Audio in O R R L L R PREPARATION AUDIO DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL AUDIO L L R MD/TAPE IN (PLAY) CD-R Optical in MD/TAPE OUT (REC) O DIGITAL INPUT Optical out Audio out CD IN (PLAY) O L CD-R R OUT (REC) Audio out DVD R CD Audio in L CD player R CD recorder* L CBL/SAT PHONO COAXIAL *Some CD recorders can be connected to the VIDEO CD-R jacks (see page 18). MAIN/SURROUND BACK CD C Coaxial out ZONE 2 SURROUND DVD Audio out DTV SUB WOOFER GND L CENTER MULCH CH INPUT ZONE 3 OUTPUT R (U.S.A. model) GND Turntable ■ Connecting a turntable y PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge, use an in-line boosting transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to these jacks. Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in the signal. However you may hear less noise without the connection to the GND terminal for some record players. 19 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 20 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting to an external amplifier If you want to increase the power output to the speakers, or want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks as follows. Notes • When audio pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT jacks for output to an external amplifier, it is not necessary to use the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Set the volume of the amplifier connected to this unit to the maximum. • The signal output through the FRONT PRE OUT and CENTER PRE OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings. • Signals will only be output from the FRONT PRE OUT jacks when SPEAKER A is turned off with ZONE B selected for SP B SET (see page 57). L R 1 FRONT R L 2 SURROUND 5 3 SUB WOOFER CENTER R L 4 SURROUND BACK /PRESENCE PRE OUT 1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks Front channel line output jacks. 2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks Surround channel line output jacks. 3 CENTER PRE OUT jack Center channel line output jack. 4 SURROUND BACK / PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks Surround back or presence channel line output jacks. 5 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, to this jack. Notes • Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signal as the corresponding speaker terminals. However, when both surround back and presence speakers are connected to this unit, the channel of the signals output from SURROUND BACK / PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks may not correspond to the location of the speakers connected through SURROUND BACK / PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks. • Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer. It is also possible to adjust the volume level by using the remote control of this unit (see “Manually adjusting speaker levels” on page 45). • Some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER jack depending on the SPEAKER SET (see page 49) and LFE LEVEL (see page 51) settings. 20 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 21 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM CONNECTIONS Connecting the antennas Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. AM loop antenna (included) Indoor FM antenna (included) Notes • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. • A property installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor antennas. PREPARATION ■ 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only) COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y VD TV 1 Open the cover of the included 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter. 2 Cut the external sleeve of the 75-ohm coaxial cable and prepare it for connection. ONITOR OUT TUNER AM ANT MAIN GND FM ANT 75Ω UNBAL. SURRO SUB WOOFE Ground (GND terminal) 3 Cut the lead wire and remove it. 4 Insert the cable wire into the slot, and clamp it with pliers. For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna 1 Set up the AM loop antenna, then connect it to the terminals on this unit. 11 (7/16) 8 (5/16) 6 (1/14) Unit: mm (inch) Lead wire Clamp Clamp Insert the wire into slot. 5 2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND terminals. Snap the cover into place. ■ FREQUENCY STEP switch (Asia and General models only) Because the interstation frequency spacing differs in different areas, set FM AM the FREQUENCY STEP switch (locating on the rear panel) according to the frequency spacing in your area. • North, Central and South America: 100 kHz/10 kHz • Other areas: 50 kHz/9 kHz Before setting this switch, disconnect this unit’s AC power cord from the wall outlet. 100kHz/10kHz 50kHz/9kHz FREQUENCY STEP 3 Orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception. 21 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 22 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM CONNECTIONS Connecting the power supply cord ■ Connecting the AC power cord (U.S.A. and Canada models) Plug the power cord into the AC inlet after all other connections are complete, then plug the power cord to an AC wall outlet. CAUTION AC OUTLETS Do not use other AC power cords. Use the one provided. Use of other power cords may result in fire hazard or electrical shock. (Other models) Plug the power cord into an AC wall outlet. ■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) (U.S.A. model) VOLTAGE SELECTOR VOLTAGE SELECTOR 2 U.K. and Australia models.............................. 1 OUTLET Korea model............................................................... None Other models.................................................. 2 OUTLETS Use these outlets to connect the power cords from your other components to this unit. Power to the AC OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). These outlets will supply power to any connected component whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to the AC OUTLET(S) is: Asia and General models .......................................... 50 W Korea model................................................................. N/A Other models ........................................................... 100 W ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are 110/120/220/230240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. ■ Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However if the power cord is disconnected from the AC wall outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. (Asia and General models) 22 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 23 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM CONNECTIONS Speaker impedance setting Turning on the power When all connections are complete, turn on the power of this unit. CAUTION If you are using 6 ohm speakers, set the impedance to 6 ohms as follows before turning on the power. 1 Be sure this unit is in the standby mode. VOLUME 1 On the front panel, while pressing down SPEAKERS A, press STANDBY/ON. “SP IMP.SET” appears on the front panel display for a few seconds, then “Minimum 8ohms” appears. STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING OPTIMIZER MIC FM/AM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING EDIT MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO INPUT SPEAKERS A VIDEO AUX B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT S VIDEO SILENT CINEMA VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL SPEAKERS A (U.S.A. model) STANDBY /ON TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM 1 POWER PHONO STANDBY TUNER SLEEP INPUT MODE CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD SP IMP.SET SELECT POWER POWER TV AV AMP REC Minimum 8ohms 2 3 1 Press SPEAKERS A or SPEAKERS B to select the impedance of your speakers. You can select either 6 ohms or 8 ohms. Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power of this unit. SYSTEM POWER STANDBY /ON Front panel Press STANDBY/ON to exit the setting. This unit will be set to the standby mode. y You can also use SP IMP.SET (see page 57) to set the speaker impedance. 2 or Remote control Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 23 PREPARATION PROGRAM PHONES 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 24 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM AUTO SETUP AUTO SETUP Introduction This receiver employs YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology which lets you avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments. The supplied optimizer microphone collects and analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening environment. Optimizer microphone setup 1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. (U.S.A. model) PRESET/TUNING OPTIMIZER MIC y FM/AM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING EDIT PROGRAM The basic setup feature (page 28) is useful if you want to set up your system quickly and with minimal effort. However, we recommend that you come back and perform auto setup later to take advantage of YPAO and enjoy even higher fidelity. PHONES MEMORY TUNING MO MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MO INPUT SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT SILENT CINEMA Notes • Loud test tones are output during the auto setup procedure. Please be ready! • If auto setup stops and error messages appear on the OSD, follow the troubleshooting on page 27. YPAO performs the following checks and makes appropriate adjustments to give you the best possible sound from your system. 2 Place the optimizer microphone on a flat level surface with the omni-directional microphone head upward, at your normal listening position. • If possible, use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer mic at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening position. WIRING Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of each speaker. DISTANCE Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening position and adjusts the timing of each channel. SIZE Checks the speaker’s frequency response and sets the appropriate low frequency crossover for each channel. EQUALIZING Adjusts frequency and levels of each channel’s parametric equalizer to reduce coloration across the channels and create a cohesive sound field. This is particularly important if you use different brands or sizes of speakers for some channels or have a room with unique sonic characteristics. YPAO equalizing calibration incorporates three parameters (frequency, level and Q factor) for each of the seven bands in its parametric equalizer to provide highly precise automatic adjustment of frequency characteristics. LEVEL Checks and adjusts the sound level (volume) of each speaker. 24 Optimizer microphone position 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 25 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM AUTO SETUP Starting the setup 5 For best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible during the auto setup procedure. If there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory. CHECK To automatically check and adjust the selected SKIP y If your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover frequency, set the volume to about half way (or slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the maximum. Switch on the receiver and video monitor. Make sure the OSD is displayed. 2 Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU. AMP y When using THX speakers, set SIZE to SKIP and make sure that SMALL or SMLx2 is selected in SPEAKER SET (page 49) and that 80Hz is selected in CROSS OVER (page 50). When EQUALIZING is selected, press j / i to select: FRONT To adjust the frequency response of each speaker in accordance with the sound of your front speakers. Recommended if your front speakers are of much higher quality than your other speakers. FLAT To average the frequency response of all speakers. Recommended if all of your speakers are of similar quality. LOW To average the frequency response of all speakers, giving priority to the accuracy of bass frequencies. MID To average the frequency response of all speakers, giving priority to the accuracy of mid-range frequencies. HIGH To average the frequency response of all speakers, giving priority to the accuracy of high frequencies. SKIP To skip the selected item and perform no adjustments. SET MENU then MENU A/B/C/D/E 3 Press u / d to select AUTO SETUP, then press i once to enter the main menu. + TV VOL CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET item. To skip the selected item and perform no adjustments. CH + PRESET TV VOL – SET MENU . ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP p /p : Up/Down - / + : Select 6 Press d to select SETUP, then press j / i to select: AUTO To automatically perform the entire auto setup procedure. STEP To pause for confirmation between each check in the auto setup procedure. RELOAD To restore the last auto setup setting. 7 Press d to select START PUSH +, then press i. Loud test tones will be output from each speaker and WAIT appears during the auto setup procedure. + TV VOL CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TV VOL – 4 Press u / d repeatedly to select WIRING, DISTANCE, SIZE, EQUALIZING or LEVEL. 1 AUTO:MENU .WIRING;;;;;CHECK DISTANCE;;;CHECK SIZE;;;;;;;CHECK EQUALIZING;;FLAT LEVEL;;;;;;CHECK SETUP;;;;;;;AUTO START PUSH + Note If E-10:OTHER ERROR appears during testing, restart the procedure from step 3. p /p : Up/Down - / + : Select 25 PREPARATION 1 When WIRING, DISTANCE, SIZE or LEVEL is selected, press j / i to select: 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 26 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM AUTO SETUP If you selected AUTO in step 6 If you selected RELOAD in step 6 The RESULT display appears for a few seconds after each check, then settings of the next item will start. The RESULT:EXIT display appears after all items are set. The RESULT:EXIT display appears. y You can display each result by pressing u once and pressing i repeatedly before exiting. Pressing d returns to the RESULT:EXIT display. 8 To apply the changes, press j / i to select SET, then press d to exit. To cancel the auto setup procedure, press j / i to select CANCEL, then press d to exit. If you selected STEP in step 6 The RESULT display appears after each check. 8 Press j / i to display RESULT:EXIT, then press j / i to select: NEXT EXIT Then press d to proceed and check the next item. Then press d to exit the auto setup. RESULT:WIRING FRONT L;;;;;;;OK p p RESULT:DISTANCE1 / p p / : Up/Down -/+ : Back/Next RESULT:EQUALIZI. EQ;;;;;FRONT L 63Hz;;;-2.0dB 125Hz;;;-5.0dB 500Hz;;;;;;0dB 630Hz;;;;;;0dB 1.0kHz;;;;;;0dB 3.15kHz;;;+3.0dB 10.0kHz;;;+1.0dB : Up/Down RESULT:LEVEL 1 / : Up/Down -/+ : Back/Next / : Up/Down -/+ : Back/Next p p . FRONT L;;;+5.0dB CENTER;;;;-4.5dB FRONT R;;;+5.5dB PRES L;;;;-3.0dB PRES R;;;;;;--dB p p . FRONT L;;;;3.20m CENTER;;;;;3.30m FRONT R;;;;2.90m PRES L;;;;;1.70m PRES R;;;;;1.50m RESULT:SIZE 1 FRONT L;;;;;;LRG p p / : Up/Down -/+ : Back/Next y • Press u / d repeatedly to move between each display. • If you are not satisfied with the result or want to manually adjust each setup parameter, use the manual setup parameters (see page 49). Notes • If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your listening environment, perform AUTO SETUP again to recalibrate your system. • In the DISTANCE results, the distance displayed may be longer than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your subwoofer. • In the EQUALIZING results, different values may be set for the same band to provide finer adjustments. 26 y You can display each result by pressing u once and pressing i repeatedly before exiting. Pressing d returns to the RESULT:EXIT display. 8 Press j / i to select SET, then press d to exit. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 27 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM AUTO SETUP ■ Troubleshooting for auto setup procedure Before auto setup Error message Cause Remedy Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected. • Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. Unplug HP! Headphones are connected. • Unplug the headphones. During auto setup Press j / i to display the detailed information about the individual error. Select RETRY to try auto setup procedure again. Cause Remedy PREPARATION Error message E-1:NO FRONT SP Front L/R channel signal(s) is (are) not detected. • Select the front speakers with SPEAKER A or B. • Check the front L/R speaker connections. E-2:NO SURR.SP A surround channel signal is not detected. • Check the surround speaker connections. E-3:NO PRES. SP A presence channel signal is not detected. • Check the presence speaker connections. E-4:SBR->SBL Only right surround back channel signal is detected. • Connect the surround back speaker to the LEFT SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS terminal if you only have one surround back speaker. E-5:NOISY Background noise is too loud. • Try auto setup procedure in quiet environment. • Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners (etc.) or move it away from this unit. E-6:CHECK SURR. Surround back speaker(s) is (are) connected, though surround L/R speakers are not. • Connect surround speakers when you use (a) surround back speaker(s). E-7:NO MIC The optimizer microphone was unplugged during the auto setup procedure. • Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. E-8:NO SIGNAL The optimizer microphone does not detect test tones. • Check the microphone setting. • Check the speaker connections and placement. E-9:USER CANCEL The auto setup procedure was cancelled because a setting which affects the auto setup was changed during the procedure. • Perform the auto setup procedure again. After auto setup Press j / i to display the detailed information about the individual warning. Warning message Cause Remedy W-1:OUT OF PHASE Speaker polarity is not correct. This message may appear depending on the speakers even when the speakers are connected correctly. • Check the speaker connections. W-2:OVER 24m (80ft) The distance between the speaker and the listening position is over 24 m (80 ft.). • Bring the speaker closer to the listening position. W-3:LEVEL ERROR The difference of volume level among speakers is excessive. (No level correction is made.) • • • • W-4:SWFR PHASE The phase polarity of the subwoofer is not correct. • We recommend that you select the opposite phase on the subwoofer if the subwoofer has a phase switch. W-5:VOL ERROR The result may not be correct because the volume was changed during the auto setup procedure. • Perform the auto setup procedure again. Do not change the volume during the auto setup procedure. Readjust the speaker installation. Check the speaker connections. Use speakers of similar quality. Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. • If the warning message W-2 or W-3 appears on the OSD, no corrections are made. In such cases, correct the problem, select CHECK in DISTANCE or LEVEL, then perform the auto setup procedure again. • If the message W-1, W-4 or W-5 appears on the OSD, corrections are made. However, the corrections may not be correct. In such cases, correct the problem, then perform the auto setup procedure again on the relevant setting items. 27 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 28 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM BASIC SETUP BASIC SETUP The basic system parameters are set automatically when you run auto setup (page 24). The basic settings are useful if you want to quickly setup your speakers or to manually adjust some of the items set in auto setup. y 3 Press d once to select BASIC MENU, then press j / i to enter the menu item. 4 When ROOM is selected, press j / i to change the setting. Select the size of the room you have installed your speakers in. Roughly speaking, the room sizes are defined as follows: • If you wish to configure the unit manually using more precise adjustments, use the detailed parameters in the SOUND menu (page 49) instead of using the BASIC menu. • Altering any parameters in the BASIC menu will reset all parameters in the SOUND menu. [U.S.A. and Canada models] S (small) 16 x 13 ft, 200 ft2 (4.8 x 4.0 m, 20 m2) M (medium) 20 x 16 ft, 300 ft2 (6.3 x 5.0 m, 30 m2) L (large) 26 x 19 ft, 450 ft2 (7.9 x 5.8 m, 45 m2) Using BASIC setup REC TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR LEARN AUDIO DISC SKIP SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP + [Other models] S (small) 3.6 x 2.8 m, 10 m2 M (medium) 4.8 x 4.0 m, 20 m2 L (large) 6.3 x 5.0 m, 30 m2 INPUT MODE VOL PHONO TUNER V-AUX DTV CD MULTI CH IN CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD – LEVEL TITLE SET MENU + 1 MUTE MENU TV VOL A/B/C/D/E TV INPUT CH + PRESET TEST 1 2-9 CH TV MUTE SELECT – PRESET ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL SELECT RETURN – DISPLAY EFFECT POWER POWER TV AV STEREO HALL JAZZ ROCK AMP 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 1 BASIC MENU 1/2 REC 1 .ROOM:[SML SWFR:[YESNONE PRESENCE;;;;NONE SPEAKERS;;;;7spk Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press SET MENU to enter the SET MENU. AMP SET MENU then MENU A/B/C/D/E 5 2 Press u / d repeatedly to select MANUAL SETUP, then press j / i to enter the selected category. CH – + + TV VOL TV VOL TV MUTE SELECT PRESET then CH + PRESET CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET TV VOL – SET MENU ;AUTO SETUP . ;MANUAL SETUP p /p : Up/Down - / + : Select If u is pressed when AUTO SETUP is selected, or if d is pressed when MANUAL SETUP is selected, SET MENU will be closed. Press u / d to open SET MENU again. 28 If you have a subwoofer in your system. If you do not have a subwoofer in your system. Press d to select PRESENCE, then press j / i to select: + PRESET TV VOL – YES NONE 6 CH Press d to select SWFR, then press j / i to select: YES NONE If you have presence speakers in your system. If you do not have presence speakers in your system. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 29 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM BASIC SETUP 7 Press d to select SPEAKERS, then press j / i to select the number of speakers connected to the unit. The choices vary as follows depending on the PRESENCE setting: YES Front L/R L C R SL SB SR 3 — — L C R SL SB SR Front L/R, Center L C R SL SB SR Front L/R, Surround L/R 4 L 5 L C R L SL R R SR L C R SL SR L C R SL SB SR 9 Presence L/R, Front L/R Presence L/R, Front L/R, Center L C R SL SB SR Presence L/R, Front L/R, Surround L/R L C R SL SB SR Presence L/R, Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R L C R SL SB SR Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R . CHECK OK?;;;;YES PREPARATION — L C R SL SB SR 8 NO To exit the setup if the test tones were satisfactory. To adjust each speaker level (see page 50). 1 BASIC MENU 2/2 — 8 YES NONE 2 7 Press d to select CHECK OK?, then press j / i to select: PRESENCE setting Choices 6 9 (when NO is selected) B)SPEAKER LEVEL . FR C SL + Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround back Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround back L/R Presence L/R, Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround back — — Presence L/R, Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround back L/R — — Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the items again. After you have finished the settings, press d, then press j / i to select: SET CANCEL To apply the changes. To cancel the setup. 1 BASIC MENU 2/2 . [SET CANCEL ROOM SIZE=SMALL If you select SET, you will hear a test tone from each speaker. 29 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 30 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM PLAYBACK PLAYBACK Basic operations 4 1 6 Select the input source. Use INPUT (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the input you desire. INPUT or PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX DTV CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD VOLUME STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING OPTIMIZER MIC FM/AM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING EDIT PROGRAM PHONES MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO Front panel A Remote control INPUT SPEAKERS VIDEO AUX B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT The current input source name and input mode appear in the front panel display and video monitor for a few seconds. EFFECT S VIDEO SILENT CINEMA VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL (U.S.A. model) 3 4 1 4 4 7 V–AUX RE–NAME CLEAR AUDIO DISC SKIP SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R + 6 VOL DTV Selected input source – LEVEL TITLE SET MENU + DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER PHONO AUTO L R Input mode MUTE MENU TV VOL A/B/C/D/E TV INPUT DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD CH CH TV MUTE SELECT – PRESET + 5 Start playback or select a broadcast station on the source component. Refer to the operation instructions for the component. 6 Adjust the volume to the desired output level. PRESET TEST ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL SELECT 7 CBL/SAT DVD SP A LEARN PHONO VCR 1 VOLUME REC TRANSMIT DVR/VCR2 RETURN – DISPLAY EFFECT POWER POWER TV AV STEREO AMP REC HALL JAZZ ROCK 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES +10 ENTER THX /DTS 9 0 7 CHP/INDEX VOLUME 1 + Press STANDBY/ON (SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power. or VOL – SYSTEM POWER STANDBY /ON or Remote control Front panel Front panel Remote control 7 2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 3 Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel. Each press turns the respective speakers on or off. Select a sound field program if desired. Use PROGRAM (or press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press one of the sound field program buttons repeatedly) to select a sound field program. See page 41 for details about sound field programs. PROGRAM or SPEAKERS A B AMP ROCK STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 THX 9 6 /DTS 0 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES +10 ENTER CHP/INDEX Front panel Remote control y When bi-wiring, select both A and B. Dialog Normalisation When this unit detects Dolby Digital signals, the following display appears for a few seconds. This shows how the signal level is being corrected to become the reference level (-27 dB, THX recommendation). DialNorm;;+4dB 30 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 31 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM PLAYBACK To listen with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) The SILENT CINEMA mode allows you to enjoy multichannel music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS surround, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA activates automatically whenever you connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs. The “SILENT CINEMA” indicator lights up on the front panel display. (If the sound field programs are off, you listen with normal stereo reproduction.) ■ Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT Press MULTI CH INPUT so that “MULTI CH INPUT” appears in the front panel display and video monitor. MULTI CH INPUT MULTI CH IN or Front panel Remote control Note This unit will not be set to the SILENT CINEMA mode when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. To adjust the tone PROGRAM ■ Playing video sources in the background You can combine a video image from a video source with a sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while having beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. Use the input selector buttons to select a video source, then select an audio source. Audio sources Notes • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the lowfrequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround speakers may not match that of the front left/right and center speakers. • TONE CONTROL is not effective when THX (page 41) or DIRECT STEREO (page 33) program is selected, or when MULTI CH INPUT is selected. • TONE CONTROL is not effective for headphones. Use HP TONE CTRL to adjust bass/treble balance for the headphones (page 53). PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX DTV CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Video sources Note If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video source and then press MULTI CH INPUT. To mute the sound Press MUTE on the remote control. MUTE “MUTE” blinks on the front panel display. To resume the audio output, press MUTE again. (or press VOL –/+). “MUTE” disappears from the display. y You can adjust the muting level (see page 53). 31 BASIC OPERATION You can adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left/right and center channels. Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly on the front panel to select TREBLE or BASS. Select TREBLE, then rotate PROGRAM to the right or left to increase or decrease the highfrequency response. Select BASS, then rotate PROGRAM to the right or left to increase or decrease the low-frequency response. To cancel the tone control, press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select BYPASS. TONE CONTROL Note When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display and/or the video monitor, no other source can be played. To select another input source with INPUT (or one of the input selector buttons), press MULTI CH INPUT to turn off “MULTI CH INPUT” from the front panel display and the video monitor. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 32 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM PLAYBACK y Selecting sound field programs Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not on the name of the program. ■ Front panel operation Notes VOLUME STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING OPTIMIZER MIC FM/AM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING EDIT PROGRAM PHONES MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO INPUT SPEAKERS A VIDEO AUX B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT S VIDEO SILENT CINEMA VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with that source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the MULTI CH INPUT is selected. • Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS 96/ 24 signals) will be sampled down to 48 kHz, then sound field programs will be applied. ■ Enjoying multi-channel software (U.S.A. model) PROGRAM Rotate PROGRAM to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears on the front panel display and on the video monitor. PROGRAM If you connected a surround back speaker, use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS ES decoders. Press EX/ES on the remote control to switch between 5.1- and 6.1/7.1- channel playback. EX/ES ENTER CHP/INDEX V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER PHONO To select a decoder, press l/h repeatedly when PLIIx Movie (etc.) is displayed. VOLUME HiFi DSP JAZZ CLUB SP A L R Program name ■ Remote control operation LEVEL MUTE SET MENU + TITLE MENU TV VOL TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN A/B/C/D/E TV INPUT LEARN CH TV MUTE SELECT – PRESET CH + PRESET TEST ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL – RETURN DISPLAY EFFECT V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD STEREO HALL JAZZ ROCK 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES /DTS THX 9 0 +10 POWER POWER TV AV Sound field program buttons ENTER CHP/INDEX SELECT AMP AMP REC AUDIO Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press one of the sound field program buttons repeatedly to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears on the front panel display and on the video monitor. ROCK STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 THX 9 6 /DTS 0 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES +10 DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER PHONO VOLUME HiFi DSP SP A JAZZ CLUB program name 32 Decoders (select with l/h) You can select from the following modes depending on the format of the software you are playing. PLIIx Movie For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx movie decoder. PLIIx Music For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx music decoder. EX/ES For playing back Dolby Digital signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital Surround EX decoder. DTS signals are played back in 6.1/7.1 channels using the DTS ES decoder. EX For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/ 7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital Surround EX decoder. OFF (OFF) For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 5.1 channels. ENTER CHP/INDEX V–AUX AUTO (AUTO) When a signal (flag) that can be recognized by the unit is input, the unit selects the optimum decoder for playing back the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels. If the unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present in the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1/ 7.1 channels. L R y When SURR B L/R SP is set to “LRGx1” or “SMLx1” (see page 49), the surround back channel will be output from the left SURROUND BACK speaker terminals. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 33 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM PLAYBACK Notes Note • Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal (flag) which this unit can automatically detect. When playing these kinds of discs with 6.1-channel, select “ON”. • 6.1-channel playback is not possible even if EX/ES is pressed in the following cases: – When SURR B L/R SP is set to “NONE” (see page 49). – When the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jack is being played. – When the source being played does not contain surround L/R channel signals. – When Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played. – When “2ch Stereo”, “7ch Stereo” or “Direct Stereo” is selected. • When the power of this unit is turned off, the input mode will be reset to AUTO. • When the DTS ES decoder is applied to DTS 96/24 signals, you cannot use the DTS 96/24 decoding feature. • The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when SURR B L/R SP is set to “NONE” (see page 49). • “PLIIx Movie” cannot be selected when SURR B L/R SP is set to “LRGx1” or “SMLx1” (see page 49). The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when SURR B L/R SP is set to “NONE” (see page 49). ■ Listening to high fidelity stereo sound (Direct Stereo) Direct Stereo allows you to bypass this unit’s decoders and DSP processors to enjoy pure high fidelity sound from 2channel PCM and analog sources. Rotate PROGRAM (or press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press STEREO repeatedly) to select DIRECT STEREO. PROGRAM or /DTS 0 You can select from the following modes depending on the type of software you are playing and your personal preference. PRO LOGIC SUR. STANDARD Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources. PRO LOGIC SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Surround sources PRO LOGIC IIx Movie * Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for movie software. PRO LOGIC IIx Music * Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for music software. PRO LOGIC IIx Game * Dolby Pro Logic II/IIx processing for game software. JAZZ 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 9 6 /DTS 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES +10 0 ENTER CHP/INDEX Front panel Remote control Direct Stereo Notes • To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in this mode. • When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, this unit automatically selects an analog signal input. (When DTS is selected as an input mode, no sound will be heard.) • No sound will be output from the subwoofer. • TONE CONTROL (page 31) and SET MENU (page 47) settings are not effective. • The front panel display automatically dims. ■ Listening at night This mode reproduces dialogue clearly while reducing the volume of loud sound effects for easier listening at low volumes or at night. Press NIGHT on the remote control. The NIGHT indicator in the front panel display lights up. Press NIGHT again to cancel. The NIGHT indicator goes off. NIGHT +10 y • You can use the night listening mode with any sound field programs except Direct Stereo (even though the NIGHT indicator lights up during Direct Stereo mode). • Night listening mode may vary in effectiveness depending on the input source and surround sound settings you use. DTS Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie software. DTS Neo:6 Music DTS processing for music software. * Use the PLII/PLIIx parameter to select the Pro Logic II or Pro Logic IIx decoders (see page 76). 33 BASIC OPERATION Press q/DTS on the remote control to select the decoder. HALL 1 THX ■ Enjoying 2-channel software Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played back on multiple channels. ROCK STEREO 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 34 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM PLAYBACK ■ Downmixing to 2 channels You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback even from multichannel sources. Rotate PROGRAM (or press STEREO on the remote control) to select 2ch Stereo. PROGRAM or Selecting input modes This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the following to select the type of input signals you want to use. ROCK STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES +10 ENTER 1 Select the input source. INPUT THX 9 /DTS 0 CHP/INDEX Front panel PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX DTV CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD or Remote control Front panel Remote control 2ch Stereo y You can use a subwoofer with this program when SWFR or BOTH is selected in LFE/BASS OUT. 2 ■ Listening to unprocessed input signals Press INPUT MODE to select an input mode. In most cases, use AUTO. TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR LEARN INPUT MODE Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to select STRAIGHT. Two channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing. SYSTEM or Front panel POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN Remote control STRAIGHT STRAIGHT or V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R EFFECT CD TUNER PHONO VOLUME EFFECT Front panel Remote control SP A DVD AUTO L R Input mode AUTO Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT again so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the display when you want to turn the sound effect back on. DTS ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field. If you do not connect surround speakers, Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program. Note Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate, even when SURR L/R SP is set to “NONE” (see page 49) in the following cases: – When MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. – When headphones are connected. 34 ANALOG Automatically selects input signals in the following order: 1) Digital signals* 2) Analog signals Selects only digital signals encoded in DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no sound is output. Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. * If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate sound field program. y You can adjust the default input mode this unit selects when the power is turned on (see page 54). 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 35 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM PLAYBACK Notes 3 • When you play DTS encoded sources with the input mode set to AUTO: – This unit automatically switches to the DTS decoding mode. The unit remains in DTS mode (and the “t” indicator may flash) for up to 30 second after playback of the DTS source is complete. To manually release the DTS mode, press INPUT MODE to reselect AUTO. – The DTS decoding mode may be released if search or skip operations are performed for more than 30 seconds. To prevent this, press INPUT MODE to select DTS. • If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. Press u / d to display the following information about the input signal. + TV VOL CH – 1 (Format) in fs CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD rate flg 2 Signal format display. When the unit cannot detect a digital signal it automatically switches to analog input. Number of source channels in the input signal. For example, a multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/ LFE”. Sampling frequency. When the unit is unable to detect the sampling frequency “Unknown” appears. Bit rate. When the unit is unable to detect the bit rate “Unknown” appears. Flag data encoded with DTS or Dolby Digital signals that cue this unit to automatically switch decoders. Press AMP to select the AMP mode, then press STRAIGHT/EFFECT so that “STRAIGHT” appears in the display. STRAIGHT AMP then EFFECT 35 BASIC OPERATION TUNER + – Select the input source. PHONO CH PRESET TV VOL Displaying the information about the input source You can display the type, format and sampling frequency of the current input signal. TV MUTE SELECT PRESET 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 36 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM TUNING TUNING Automatic and manual tuning 4 There are 2 tuning methods; automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. ■ Automatic tuning Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin automatic tuning. Press h to tune in to a higher frequency, or press l to tune in to a lower frequency. VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD PRESET/TUNING TUN AUTO TUNED A~~AM~1530 kHz When tuned in to a station, the “TUNED” indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown on the front panel display. VOLUME STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING OPTIMIZER MIC FM/AM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING EDIT PROGRAM PHONES MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO ■ Manual tuning SPEAKERS A If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, you must tune into it manually. Manually tuning in to an FM station will automatically change the reception mode to monaural to increase the signal quality. INPUT VIDEO AUX B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT S VIDEO SILENT CINEMA (U.S.A. model) 1 32 4 1 VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL 3 1 Select TUNER and the reception band following steps 1 and 2 as described in “Automatic tuning”. 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator disappears from the front panel display. Rotate INPUT (or press TUNER on the remote control) to select TUNER as the input source. INPUT PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD or Front panel Remote control AUTO TUNING MODE Disappears AUTO/MAN'L MONO 2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display. If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn the colon (:) off. FM/AM or PRESET/TUNING VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNE TUNED 3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel display. AUTO TUNING MODE Lights up AUTO/MAN'L MONO VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUN AUTO TUNED EDIT 36 3 A~~AM~1440 kHz Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune in to the desired station manually. Hold down the button to continue searching. PRESET/TUNING If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn the colon (:) off. PRESET/TUNING EDIT A~~AM~1440 kHz 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 37 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM TUNING Notes Presetting stations ■ Automatically presetting FM stations You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations. This function enables this unit to automatically tune in to FM stations with strong signals, and to store up to 40 (8 stations x 5 groups, A1-E8) of those stations in order. You can then recall any preset station easily by selecting the preset station number. Automatic preset tuning options VOLUME PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING EDIT PROGRAM PHONES MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO INPUT SPEAKERS A VIDEO AUX B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT S VIDEO SILENT CINEMA (U.S.A. model) 1 1 VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL 3 2 Press FM/AM to select the FM band. FM/AM 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L MONO) so that the “AUTO” indicator lights up on the front panel display. AUTO TUNING MODE Lights up AUTO/MAN'L MONO 3 Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If so, store the stations again by using the presetting station methods. Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for more than 3 seconds. The preset number, the “MEMORY” and “AUTO” indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts from the frequency currently displayed and proceeds toward the higher frequencies. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER AUTO MEMORY SP A A1:FM 87.5 MHz PHONO VOLUME L R When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. 37 BASIC OPERATION You can select the preset number from which this unit will store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower frequencies. After pressing MEMORY in step 3: 1 Press A/B/C/D/E, then PRESET/TUNING l / h to select the preset number under which the first station will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when stations have all been stored up to E8. 2 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon (:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning toward lower frequencies. STANDBY /ON OPTIMIZER MIC • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • If the number of the received stations does not reach 40 (E8) E8, automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after searching all stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune in to it manually in the monaural mode, and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting stations”. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 38 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM TUNING ■ Manually presetting stations You can also store up to 40 stations (8 stations x 5 groups) manually. 4 VOLUME Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a preset station number (1 to 8) while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. Press h to select a higher preset station number. Press l to select a lower preset station number. STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING OPTIMIZER MIC FM/AM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING EDIT PROGRAM PHONES MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO PRESET/TUNING INPUT SPEAKERS A VIDEO AUX B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT S VIDEO SILENT CINEMA VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL (U.S.A. model) 3 4 2,5 V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER PHONO VOLUME TUNED MEMORY SP A 1 Tune in to a station. See page 36 for tuning instructions. V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER PHONO 5 VOLUME TUNED SP AB A :AM 630 kHz L R When tuned in to a station, the front panel display shows the frequency of the station received. 2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM). The “MEMORY” indicator flashes for about 5 seconds. C3:AM 630 kHz L R Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the front panel while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. The station band and MEMORY frequency appear on the front MAN'L/AUTO FM panel display with the preset group and number you have selected. V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER PHONO VOLUME TUNED MEMORY MEMORY SP A MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM C3:AM 630 kHz L R Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3. Flashes 6 3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the “MEMORY” indicator is flashing. The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:) appears on the front panel display. A/B/C/D/E V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER PHONO VOLUME TUNED MEMORY SP A 38 C :AM 630 kHz L R Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations. Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 39 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM TUNING Selecting preset stations Exchanging preset stations You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the preset station number under which it was stored. You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”. VOLUME VOLUME STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING MEMORY TUNING MODE STANDBY /ON OPTIMIZER MIC EDIT MAN'L/AUTO FM PROGRAM PHONES AUTO/MAN'L MONO INPUT PRESET/TUNING SPEAKERS A FM/AM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO VIDEO AUX B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT OPTIMIZER MIC EDIT PROGRAM EFFECT S VIDEO SILENT CINEMA VIDEO L AUDIO R INPUT OPTICAL PHONES SPEAKERS A VIDEO AUX B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT S VIDEO SILENT CINEMA 2,4 TITLE SET MENU + MUTE MENU TV VOL A/B/C/D/E TV INPUT CH – CH TV MUTE SELECT + PRESET PRESET TEST ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN – DISPLAY 1 2 AUDIO R OPTICAL (U.S.A. model) 1,3 1,3 Select preset station “E1” by using the A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. See “Selecting preset stations”. 2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the front panel display. Press A/B/C/D/E to select the preset station group. The preset group letter appears on the front panel display and changes each time you press the button. CR2 PRESET/TUNING VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD BASIC OPERATION 1 EFFECT 1 L (U.S.A. model) 1 2 LEVEL VIDEO TUNER VO TUNED MEMORY A/B/C/D/E E1:FM 87.5 MHz SET MENU or EDIT MENU A/B/C/D/E Front panel 2 Remote control 3 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (PRESET j / i on the remote control) to select a preset station number (1 to 8). The preset group and number appear on the front panel display along with the station band, frequency and the “TUNED” indicator lights up. + or CH CH TV MUTE SELECT – V–AUX + PRESET PRESET DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER PHONO VOLUME TUNED MEMORY SP AB 4 TV VOL PRESET/TUNING Select preset station “A5” by using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. “A5” and the “MEMORY” indicator flash on the front panel display. A5:FM 90.6 MHz L R Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again. The stations stored at the two preset assignments are exchanged. TV VOL – Front panel Remote control PRESET/TUNING EDIT V–AUX DVR/VCR2 SP A VCR 1 CBL/SAT EDIT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R E1-A5 Shows the exchange of stations is complete. CR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER VO TUNED E1:FM 87.5 MHz 39 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 40 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM RECORDING RECORDING Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operation instructions for those components. VOLUME STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING OPTIMIZER MIC FM/AM A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING EDIT PROGRAM PHONES MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L MONO INPUT SPEAKERS A VIDEO AUX B STRAIGHT TONE CONTROL INPUT MODE MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT S VIDEO SILENT CINEMA VIDEO L AUDIO R OPTICAL (U.S.A. model) 1 2 1 Turn on the power of this unit and all connected components. 2 Select the source component you want to record from. INPUT PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD or Front panel Remote control 3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source component. 4 Start recording on the recording component. 40 Notes • Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. • When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • The setting of TONE CONTROL, VOLUME, “Speaker level” (page 50) and programs does not affect the recorded material. • A source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • S-video and composite video signals pass independently through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source component is connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal to your VCR. • A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not output on VCR 1 OUT.) • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. If you playback a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. ■ Special considerations when recording DTS software The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. For LDs, DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your player is compatible with the DTS format, follow its operation instruction to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 41 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multichannel playback from almost any sound source (stereo or multichannel). This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience. Most of these sound field programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters. y The Yamaha CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set INPUT MODE to AUTO (see page 34) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal. For movie/video sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI” can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel (stereo) sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc. Program Features Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 (left and right) channels or plays back 2-channel sources as is. MOVIE THEATER: Spectacle CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). MOVIE THEATER: Sci-Fi CINEMA DSP processing. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. MOVIE THEATER: Adventure CINEMA DSP processing. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. MOVIE THEATER: General CINEMA DSP processing. This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the echo effect of conversations without losing clarity. THX Cinema THX processing for any multi-channel sources. THX Surr. EX THX processing for Dolby Digital and Dolby Digital EX sources. This program is available only when surround back L/R speakers are connected to this unit and when the input source contains surround back channel signals. dts ES+THX THX processing for DTS ES sources. DOLBY DIGITAL: SUR. STANDARD Standard 5.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources. DOLBY DIGITAL: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for Dolby Digital sources. q D+PLIIx Movie: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1/7.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources. q D+PLIIx Movie: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1/7.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources. DOLBY D EX: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources. MULTI 2-CH MULTI 41 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS STEREO: 2ch Stereo Sources 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 42 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS Program Features DOLBY D EX: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for Dolby Digital sources. DTS: SUR. STANDARD Standard 5.1 channel processing for DTS and 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources. DTS: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for DTS sources. DTS+PLIIx Movie: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1/7.1 channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx) for DTS sources. DTS+PLIIx Movie: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1/7.1 channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic IIx) for DTS sources. DTS+DOLBY EX: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources. DTS+DOLBY EX: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources. DTS ES Mtrx 6.1: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS ES Matrix) for DTS sources. DTS ES Mtrx 6.1: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing (DTS ES Matrix) for DTS sources. DTS ES Dscrt 6.1: SUR. STANDARD Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS ES Discrete) for DTS sources. DTS ES Dscrt 6.1: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing (DTS ES Discrete) for DTS sources. PRO LOGIC: SUR. STANDARD Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources. PRO LOGIC: SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced precessing for Dolby Surround sources. PRO LOGIC IIx: PLIIx Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie software. PRO LOGIC II: PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie software. PRO LOGIC IIx: PLIIx Game Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for game software. PRO LOGIC II: PLII Game Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game software. DTS: Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie software. 42 Sources MULTI 2-CH 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 43 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS For music sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc. Program Features CONCERT HALL HiFi DSP processing. A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which produce a very full, rich sound. JAZZ CLUB HiFi DSP processing. This is the sound field at stage front in “The bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering a real and vibrant sound. ROCK CONCERT HiFi DSP processing. The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall. ENTERTAINMENT: Disco HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by highenergy, “immediate” sound. q D+PLIIx Music: SUR. STANDARD Standard Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources. q D+PLIIx Music: SUR. ENHANCED DSP enhanced Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources. DTS+PLIIx Music: SUR. STANDARD Standard DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources. DTS+PLIIx Music: SUR. ENHANCED DSP enhanced DTS and Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources. STEREO: 2ch Stereo 2 (left and right) channel playback. STEREO: Direct Stereo Use to output stereo sources to only the front left and right speakers without any processing. STEREO: 7ch Stereo Use to increase the output stereo sources (in stereo) from all speakers. This provides a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc. PRO LOGIC IIx: PLIIx Music Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music software. PRO LOGIC II: PLII Music Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music software. DTS: Neo:6 Music DTS processing for music software. Sources MULTI 2-CH MULTI 2-CH ADVANCED OPERATION 43 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 44 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM ADVANCED OPERATIONS ADVANCED OPERATIONS Selecting the OSD mode Using the sleep timer You can display this unit’s operating information on a video monitor. If you display the SET MENU and sound field program parameter settings on a monitor, it is much easier to see the available options and parameters than it is by reading this information on the front panel display. 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Press ON SCREEN repeatedly to change the OSD mode. The OSD mode changes in the following order: full display, short DISPLAY display, and display off. Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off any external components connected to the AC OUTLET(S). ■ Setting the sleep timer TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM ON SCREEN POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 2 SELECT POWER POWER TV AV AMP Full display Always shows the sound field program parameter settings as well as the contents of the front panel display. 1 Short display Briefly shows the contents of the front panel display at the bottom of the screen each time you operate this unit. Select a source and start playback on the source component. 2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to SLEEP set the amount of time. Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. The SLEEP indicator flashes while switching the amount of time for sleep timer. Display off P02 CONCERT HALL .DSPLEVEL;;;;0dB INITDLY;;;;30ms ROOMSIZE;;;;1.0 LIVENESS;;;;;;;5 SLEEP 120 min. P02CONCERTHALL Full display SLEEP OFF SLEEP 90 min. SLEEP 30 min. SLEEP 60 min. Short display V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER PHONO VOLUME SLEEP Notes • The OSD signal is not output to the REC OUT jack, and will not be recorded. • You can set the OSD to turn on (gray background) or off when a video source is not being reproduced (or the source component is turned off) by using “Display set” (see page 56). SP A HiFi DSP SLEEP 120min L R The “SLEEP” indicator lights up on the front panel display after the sleep timer has been set. SLEEP Indicator V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD–R CD TUNER PHONO VOLUME SLEEP SP A 44 HiFi DSP CONCERT HALL L R 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 45 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM ADVANCED OPERATIONS ■ Canceling the sleep timer Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears on the front panel display. After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, and the “SLEEP” indicator goes off. SLEEP y The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) to set this unit to the standby mode. Manually adjusting speaker levels You can adjust the output level of each speaker while listening to a music source. This is also possible when playing sources through the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Please note that this operation will override the level adjustments made in “AUTO SETUP” (page 24), “Speaker level” (page 50) and “Using the test tone” (page 46). POWER POWER TV AV AMP 1 REC AUDIO + DISC SKIP VOL – 2 LEVEL TITLE SET MENU + MUTE MENU TV VOL A/B/C/D/E TV INPUT CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TEST ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN – DISPLAY EFFECT 3 1 Press AMP to select the AMP mode. 2 Press LEVEL repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. FRONT L CENTER FRONT R SUR.R SUR.B.R SUR.B.L SUR.L SWFR PRES AMP LEVEL TITLE TV INPUT Front left speaker level Center speaker level Front right speaker level Surround right speaker level Surround back right speaker level Surround back left speaker level Surround left speaker level Subwoofer level Presence speaker level y 3 Press j / i to adjust the speaker output level. • The control range is from +10 dB to –10 dB. + TV VOL CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TV VOL – Note When inputting digital signals with sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz, only the subwoofer level can be adjusted. 45 ADVANCED OPERATION Once you press LEVEL, you can also select the speaker by pressing u / d. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 46 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM ADVANCED OPERATIONS If you do not use the presence speakers Using the test tone You can use the test tone feature to manually balance your speaker levels. Please note that this operation will override the level adjustments made in “AUTO SETUP” (page 24), “Speaker level” (page 50) and “Manually adjusting speaker levels” (page 45). Use the test tone to set speaker levels so that the volume from each speaker is identical when heard from your listening position. 5 Press TEST when you have completed your adjustment. The test tone stops. Note If PRESENCE is set to YES, press TEST twice to stop the test tone. If you use the presence speakers y • Use a handheld SPL meter, hold at arms length and point upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each speaker to 75 dB. • Before outputting the test tone, we recommend that you set the output volume to 0 dB. 5 TEST TEST TEST TEST Note You cannot enter test mode if headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. Remove the headphones from the PHONES jack. POWER POWER TV AV AMP 1 REC AUDIO DISC SKIP + Press TEST. The unit will output a test tone. FRONT PRESENCE PRES L PRES R Front speakers Presence speakers Presence left speaker Presence right speaker 6 Press u / d repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. 7 Press j / i to adjust speaker volumes. 8 Press TEST when you have completed your adjustment. The test tone stops. VOL – LEVEL SET MENU + TITLE 4 A/B/C/D/E TV INPUT CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET 2,5 MUTE MENU TV VOL CH + PRESET TEST ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN – DISPLAY 3 EFFECT 1 Press AMP to select the AMP mode. 2 Press TEST. The unit will output a test tone. TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST TEST LEFT CENTER RIGHT R SUR. R SUR. B L SUR. B L SUR. SUBWOOFER Front left speaker Center speaker Front right speaker Right surround speaker Right surround back speaker Left surround back speaker Left surround speaker Subwoofer 3 Press u / d repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. 4 Press j / i to adjust speaker volumes. 46 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 47 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SET MENU SET MENU You can use the following parameters in the set menu to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. ■ Auto Setup Use to specify which speaker parameters auto setup will adjust, and to activate the auto setup procedure (see page 24). ■ Manual Setup Use to manually adjust speaker and system settings. y Most of the parameters described in the SOUND menu are set automatically when you run auto setup (see page 24). You can use the SOUND menu to make further adjustments, but we recommend running auto setup first. Basic menu Use to quickly setup basic system parameters (see page 28). Sound menu Use to manually adjust any speaker setting or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. Item Features Page Selects the output mode suitable for each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the cross over frequency. 49 SP LEVEL Adjusts the output level of each speaker. 50 SP DISTANCE Adjusts the delay time of each speaker. 51 GRAPHIC EQ Adjusts the tonal quality of each speaker. 51 LFE LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 51 DYNAMIC RANGE Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 52 LOW FRQ. TEST Matches the subwoofer level with the level of the other speakers. 52 HP TONE CTRL Adjusts the tonal balance of the headphones. 53 AUDIO SET Customizes overall audio settings of this unit. 53 Selects priority to either surround back or presence speakers when both sets of speakers are PR/SBch SELECT connected to this unit. ADVANCED OPERATION SPEAKER SET 53 Input menu Use to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input mode, rename your inputs, or specify external input settings. Item Features Page I/O ASSIGN Assigns jacks according to the component to be used. 54 INPUT MODE Selects the initial input mode of the source. 54 INPUT RENAME Changes the name of the inputs. 55 EXT.INPUT Sets the direction of the signals input into the center, subwoofer and surround channels for the source component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. 55 47 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 48 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SET MENU Option menu Use to adjust the optional system settings. Item Features Page DISPLAY SET Adjusts the OSD and converts video signals. 56 MEMORY GUARD Locks sound field program parameters and other SET MENU settings. 56 PARAM. INI Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs. 57 SP IMP. SET Selects the impedance of your speakers. 57 ZONE SET Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. 57 ZONE2 SET Selects the Zone 2 mode. 58 Using SET MENU 3 Press u / d repeatedly to select a menu, then press j / i to enter the menu item. Repeat this operation to navigate to and enter the setup mode of the item you want to adjust. 4 Press j / i repeatedly to change the setting of the item you want to adjust. 5 To exit, press u / d repeatedly until the menu disappears or just press one of the sound field program group buttons. Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. POWER POWER TV AV AMP 1 REC AUDIO + DISC SKIP VOL – LEVEL MUTE SET MENU + TITLE MENU TV VOL 2,3,4 TV INPUT A/B/C/D/E CH TV MUTE SELECT – PRESET CH + PRESET TEST ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL – RETURN DISPLAY 2,3,5 EFFECT STEREO 5 HALL ROCK JAZZ 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES +10 ENTER /DTS THX 9 0 + TV VOL CHP/INDEX CH 1 2 – Press AMP to select the AMP mode. AMP CH – + TV VOL then CH + CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TV VOL TV VOL – – SET MENU . ;AUTO SETUP ;MANUAL SETUP p p / : Up/Down - / + : Select If u is pressed when AUTO SETUP is selected, or if d is pressed when MANUAL SETUP is selected, SET MENU will be closed. Press u / d to open SET MENU again. 48 + or ROCK STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES PRESET – + PRESET CH THX TV VOL TV MUTE SELECT PRESET TV VOL Press u / d to select AUTO SETUP or MANUAL SETUP, then press j / i to enter the selected category. PRESET TV MUTE SELECT 9 /DTS 0 +10 ENTER CHP/INDEX Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, if the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. If so, adjust the items again. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 49 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SET MENU Manual setup: SOUND Surround left/right speakers SURR L/R SP Choices: LARGE, SMALL, NONE Use to manually adjust any speaker setting or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. Most of the SOUND parameters are set automatically when you run auto setup (see page 24). 2 SOUND MENU /p : Up/Down - / + : Select p . A)SPEAKERSET B)SPEAKERLEVEL C)SPDISTANCE D)GRAFICEQ ■ Speaker set SPEAKER SET Use to manually adjust any speaker setting. Note Set any THX speakers to SMALL. MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > SPEAKER SET > Center speaker CENTER SP Choices: LARGE, SMALL, NONE CENTER SP SURR L/R SP NONE [SML LRG • Select LARGE if you have large surround left and right speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the surround speakers. The entire range of the surround channel signal is directed to the surround left and right speakers. • Select SMALL if you have small surround left and right speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround channel are directed to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”. • Select NONE if you do not have surround speakers. This will set the unit to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 34) and automatically set the surround back speaker setting (SURR B L/R SP below) to NONE. Surround back left/right speakers SURR B L/R SP Choices: LRGx2, LRGx1, SMLx2, SMLx1, NONE SURR B L/R SP NONE [SML LRG Front speakers FRONT SP Choices: LARGE, SMALL FRONT SP [SMALL LARGE • Select LARGE if you have large front speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the front left and right channel signals to the front left and right speakers. • Select SMALL if you have small front speakers. The unit directs the low-frequency signals of the front channel to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”. SWLx1 [SMLx2 • Select LRGx2 if you have 2 large surround back speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the surround back channel signal to the surround back speakers. • Select LRGx1 if you have a large surround back speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the surround back channel signal to the left surround back speaker. • Select SMLx2 if you have 2 small surround back speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround back channels are directed to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”. • Select SMLx1 if you have a small surround back speaker. The low-frequency signals of the surround back channel are directed to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”, and the rest of the frequency signals are directed to the left surround back speaker. • Select NONE if you do not have a surround back speaker. The unit directs all of the surround back channel signal to the surround left and right speakers. Note If you select LRGx1 or SMLx1, connect a speaker to the left SURROUND BACK speaker terminals. 49 ADVANCED OPERATION • Select LARGE if you have a large center speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the center channel signal to the center speaker. • Select SMALL if you have a small center speaker. The unit directs the low-frequency signals of the center channel to the speakers selected with “BASS OUT”. • Select NONE if you do not have a center speaker. The unit directs all of the center channel signal to the front left and right speakers. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 50 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SET MENU Presence speakers PRESENCE SP Choices: NONE, YES PRESENCE SP NONE ■ Speaker level SP LEVEL Use these settings to manually balance the speaker levels between the front left or surround left speakers and each speaker selected in SPEAKER SET (page 49). MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > SP LEVEL > B)SPEAKER LEVEL [YES . FR C SL + • Select YES if you have presence speakers. • Select NONE if you do not have presence speakers. LFE/bass out LFE/BASS OUT LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit decodes a Dolby Digital or DTS signal. The Lowfrequency signals can be directed to both front left and right speakers, and to the subwoofer (subwoofer can be used for both stereo reproduction and the sound field program). Choices: SWFR (subwoofer), FRNT, BOTH THX recommendation: SWFR LFE/BASS OUT [SWFR FRNT BOTH • Select SWFR if you connect a subwoofer. The unit directs all LFE and low-frequency signals to the subwoofer. • Select FRNT if you do not connect a subwoofer. The unit directs all low-frequency and LFE signals to the front speakers (even if you have previously set FRONT SP to SMALL). • Select BOTH to direct LFE signals to the subwoofer. Other low-frequency signals are directed to both the subwoofer and the other front channels in accordance with your other speaker settings. Cross over CROSS OVER Use this feature to select a cross-over (cut-off) frequency for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer. Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz THX recommendation: 80Hz CROSS OVER FREQ;;;80Hz(THX) 50 Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB • FR adjusts the balance of the front left and front right speakers. • C adjusts the balance of the front left and center speakers. • SL adjusts the balance of the front left and surround left speakers. • SBL* adjusts the balance of the surround left and surround back left speakers. • SBR* adjusts the balance of the surround left and surround back right speakers. • SR adjusts the balance of the surround left and surround right speakers. • SWFR adjusts the balance of the front left speaker and subwoofer. • PRES adjusts the balance of the front and presence speakers. * SB will be displayed if you selected only one surround back speaker in SURR B L/R SP (page 49). y Use a handheld SPL meter, hold at arms length and point upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each speaker to 75 dB. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 51 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SET MENU ■ Speaker distance SP DISTANCE Use this feature to manually input the distance of each speaker and adjust the delay applied to respective channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position. However, this is not possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sound will arrive at the listening position at the same time. To access these parameters, select: MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > SP DISTANCE > C)SP DISTANCE ■ Graphic equalizer GRAPHIC EQ Use this feature to select parametric (PEQ) or graphic equalizer (GEQ). To access these parameters, select: MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > GRAPHIC EQ > Equalizer select EQ SELECT Choices: PEQ, GEQ • Select PEQ to use the equalizer adjusted in auto setup. • Select GEQ to adjust the built-in 7-band graphic equalizer so that the center, surround L/R and surround back L/R speakers tonal quality matches that of the left and right front speakers. . UNIT;;;;;;meters FRONTL;;;;2.30m FRONTR;;;;2.30m CENTER;;;;;2.00m D)GRAPHIC EQ p /p : Up/Down - / + : Adjust Unit UNIT Choices: meters (m), feet (ft) Initial setting: U.S.A. and Canada models: feet (ft) Other models: meters (m) • Select meters to input speaker distances in meters. • Select feet to input speaker distances in feet. Choices: –6 to +6 (dB) You can adjust 7 frequency bands: 63Hz, 160Hz, 400Hz, 1kHz, 2.5kHz, 6.3kHz, 16kHz ■ Low-frequency effect level LFE LEVEL Use to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries lowfrequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. To access these parameters, select: MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > LFE LEVEL E)LFE LEVEL ADVANCED OPERATION . SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB HEADPHONE;;;;0dB / : Up/Down -/+ : Adjust p p Speaker distances Choices: 0.3 to 24.00 m (1 to 80 ft) • FRONT L adjusts the distance of the front left speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • FRONT R adjusts the distance of the front right speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • CENTER adjusts the distance of the center speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • SURR L adjusts the distance of the surround left speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • SURR R adjusts the distance of the surround right speaker. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) • SB adjusts the distance of the surround back left speakers. Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft) • SWFR adjusts the distance of the subwoofer. Initial setting: 3.0 m (10.0 ft) . CHANNEL;;FRONT L + 63Hz 0dB 160Hz 0dB 400Hz 0dB 1kHz 0dB 2.5kHz 0dB 6.3kHz 0dB 16kHz 0dB Choices: –20 to 0 (dB) Speaker SPEAKER Select to adjust the speaker LFE level. Headphone HEADPHONE Select to adjust the headphone LFE level. Note Depending on the settings of LFE LEVEL, some signals may not be output from the SUBWOOFER jack. 51 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 52 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SET MENU ■ Dynamic range DYNAMIC RANGE Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression to be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals. To access these parameters, select: MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > DYNAMIC RANGE > ■ Low frequency test LOW FRQ. TEST Use this feature to adjust the output level of the subwoofer so it matches your other speakers. To access these parameters, select: MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > LOW FRQ. TEST > G)LOW FRQ.TEST . TEST_TONE;;;;OFF OUTPUT;FRONT L/R FRQ;;;;;;;;;88Hz F)DYNAMIC RANGE . SP: MIN STD[MAX HP: MIN STD[MAX p p / : Up/Down -/+ : Adjust p p / : Up/Down -/+ : Adjust Choices: MIN (minimum), STD (standard), MAX (maximum) 1 Press j / i to set TEST TONE to ON, and adjust the volume with VOL –/+ so you can hear the tone. Do not turn up the volume too high. If no test tone is heard, turn down the volume, set this unit in the standby mode and make sure all the necessary connections are correct. • The tone generator produces a narrow-band noise centered on a specified frequency by the band pass filter besides a wide-band noise. 2 Press d to go to “OUTPUT” and press j / i to select the speaker you want to compare with the subwoofer. Choices: FRONT L/R, FRONT L, CENTER, FRONT R, SUR.R, SBR*, SBL*, SUR.L, SWFR, PRESENCE SP Select to adjust the speaker compression. HP Select to adjust the headphone compression. • Select MAX for feature films. • Select STD for general use. • Select MIN for listening to sources at low volume levels. * SB will be displayed if you selected only one surround back speaker in SURR B L/R SP (page 49). 3 Press d to go to “FRQ” and press j / i to select the frequency you want to use. Choices: 35 to 250 (Hz), Initial: 88 Hz 4 Adjust the volume of the subwoofer with the controls on the subwoofer so it matches that of the speaker you are comparing it to. y You can use the test tone not only for adjusting the subwoofer level, but also for checking the low-frequency characteristics of your listening room. Low-frequency sounds are especially affected by the listener’s position, speaker placement, subwoofer polarity and other conditions. 52 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 53 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SET MENU ■ Headphone tone control HP TONE CTRL ■ Presence/surround back channel select Use to adjust the amount of bass and treble output to your headphones. To access these parameters, select: MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > HP TONE CTRL > PR/SBch SELECT You can select to prioritize either the surround back or presence speakers when playing sources that contain surround back channel signals using CINEMA DSP sound field programs. MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > PR/SBch SELECT > H)HP TONE CTRL . BASS TRBL + 0dB / : Up/Down -/+ : Adjust J)PR/SBch SELECT PRch [SBch p p / : Exit -/+ : Select • Use BASS to adjust the headphone bass level. • Use TRBL to adjust the headphone treble level. Choices: –6 to +6 (dB), Initial: 0 dB ■ Audio set AUDIO SET Use to customize this units overall audio settings. To access these parameters, select: MANUAL SETUP > SOUND MENU > AUDIO SET I)AUDIO SET . AUDIO MUTE;;MUTE AUDIO DELAY;;0ms DIALG.LIFT;;;OFF Choices: PRch, SBch • Select SBch to use surround back speakers when a surround back channel signal is detected in a CINEMA DSP program. Presence channel signals will be output from front speakers. • Select PRch to use presence speakers even when surround back channel signals are input. The signals for the surround back channel will be output from surround speakers. p p / : Exit -/+ : Select Mute MUTE Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the output volume. Choices: MUTE, –20 dB • Select MUTE to completely halt all output of sound. • Select –20 dB to reduce the current volume by 20 dB. ADVANCED OPERATION Delay DELAY Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the video image. This may be necessary when using certain LCD monitors or projectors. Choices: 0 to 240 (ms) Dialog lift DIALG.LIFT Use to turn on/off the DIALG.LIFT parameter (see page 76). This parameter adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.) by assigning some of the front and center channel elements to the presence speakers. Choices: ON, OFF • Select ON to turn on DIALG.LIFT effect. • Select OFF to turn off DIALG.LIFT effect. Note DIALG.LIFT appears only when PRESENCE is set to YES (see page 28). 53 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 54 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SET MENU Manual setup: INPUT 3 INPUT MENU OPTICAL IN for OPTICAL INPUT jacks (3), (4), (5) and (6) Choices: CD, PHONO, DVR/VCR 2, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, DTV, DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R OPTICAL IN . A)I/OASSIGNMENT B)INPUTMODE C)INPUTRENAME D)EXT.INPUT . (3);;;;; CD ( CD ) (4);;;;; DVD (DVD ) (5);;;;; DTV (DTV ) p /p : Up/Down - / + : Select ■ Input/output assignment I/O ASSIGN You can assign jacks according to the component to be used if this unit’s initial settings do not correspond to your needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and effectively connect more components. Once the inputs have been reassigned, you can select the corresponding component by using INPUT on the front panel or the input selector buttons on the remote control. MANUAL SETUP > INPUT MENU > I/O ASSIGN > COAXIAL IN for COAXIAL INPUT jacks (7), (8) and (9) Choices: CD, PHONO, V-AUX, DVR/VCR 2, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, DTV, DVD, MD/TAPE, CD-R COAXIAL IN . (7);;;;; CD ( CD ) (8);;;;; DVD (DVD ) (9);;;;;DVR/VCR2 (DVR/VCR2) y The default settings are displayed with parentheses on the OSD. CMPNT-V IN for COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT jacks [A] and [B] Choices: DVD, V-AUX, DVR/VCR 2, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, DTV, CD-R CMPNT-V INPUT . [A];;;;; DVD ( DVD ) [B];;;;; DTV (DTV) OPTICAL OUT for OPTICAL OUTPUT jacks (1) and (2) Choices: MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, PHONO, V-AUX, DVR/VCR 2, VCR 1, CBL/SAT, DTV, DVD Notes • You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same type of jack. • When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the input signals from the COAXIAL jack. ■ Input mode INPUT MODE Use this feature to designate the input mode for sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks when you turn on this unit (see page 34 for details about the input mode). MANUAL SETUP > INPUT MENU > INPUT MODE > B)INPUT MODE AUTO [LAST p p / : Exit -/+ : Select OPTICAL OUT . (1);;;;;MD/TAPE (MD/TAPE ) (2);;;;; CD-R (CD-R) Choices: AUTO, LAST • Select AUTO to allow this unit to automatically detect the type of input signal and select the appropriate input mode. • Select LAST to set this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for that source. Note Even if LAST is selected, the last setting for the EX/ES button will not be recalled. 54 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 55 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SET MENU ■ Input rename INPUT RENAME Use this feature to change the name of the inputs on the OSD and front panel display. MANUAL SETUP > INPUT MENU > INPUT RENAME > C)INPUT RENAME CD -> CD p p -/+ : Position / : Character Press an input selector button to select the input you want to change the name of. 2 Press j / i to place the _ (under-bar) under the space or the character you want to edit. 3 Press u / d to select the character you want to use and j / i to move to the next one. • You can use up to 8 characters for each input. • Press d to change the character in the following order, or press u to go in the reverse order: A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, #, *, +, etc. • Repeat steps 1 to 3 to rename each input. 4 Press i repeatedly to exit from INPUT RENAME. Use this feature to set the direction of the signals input into the center, subwoofer and surround channels when the source component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. If you are inputting 8-channel signals from an external decoder, use this feature to select jacks for the additional front signals. MANUAL SETUP > INPUT MENU > EXT.INPUT > D)EXT.INPUT . [6CH 8CH (FRNT/SB-> FRNT) CENTER ->CENTER SWFR -> SWFR SL/SR -> SL/SR ( ---> SB ) -/+ Select / : Up/Down p p 1 ■ External input EXT.INPUT 6ch/8ch This setting is used to select the number of channels input from an external decoder. Choices: 6ch, 8ch FRONT If you selected 8ch, you can select analog audio jacks to which front signals from an external decoder will be input. Choices: DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, MD/TAPE, CD-R, CD, V-AUX CENTER Use to select where the signals input to the CENTER jack will be output. Choices: CENTER, FRONT • Select CENTER to output the signals from the center speaker. • Select FRONT to output the signals from the front left and right speakers. SL/SR Use to select where the signals input to the SURROUND jacks will be output. Choices: SL/SR, FRONT • Select SL/SR to output the signals from the surround speakers. • Select FRONT to output the signals from the front left and right speakers. 55 ADVANCED OPERATION SWFR Use to select where the signals input to the SUBWOOFER jack will be output. Choices: SWFR, FRONT • Select SWFR to output the signals from the subwoofer. • Select FRONT to output the signals from the front left and right speakers. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 56 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SET MENU Manual setup: OPTION 4 OPTION MENU . A)DISPLAYSET B)MEMORYGUARD C)PARAM.INI D)ZONESET p /p : Up/Down - / + : Select ■ Display set DISPLAY SET MANUAL SETUP > OPTION MENU > DISPLAY SET > A)DISPLAY SET . DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0 OSD SHIFT;;;;;;0 GRAY BACK;;;AUTO V CONV.;;;;;;;ON CMPNT OSD;;;;OFF p p / : Up/Down -/+ : Select Dimmer DIMMER Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Choices: –4 to 0 OSD shift OSD SHIFT Use to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Choices: +5 (downward) to –5 (upward) • Press + to lower the position of the OSD. • Press – to raise the position of the OSD. Gray back GRAY BACK Selecting AUTO for the on-screen display setting displays a gray background when there’s no video signal input. Nothing is displayed if OFF is selected. Choices: AUTO, OFF Note If “GRAY BACK” is set to OFF, no information will be displayed on the screen when video signals are not being input. Video conversion V CONV. Use this feature to turn on/off the conversion of composite signals to both S-video and component signals. This allows you to output coverted video signals from the Svideo jack or the component video jack when no S-video or component signals are input. This feature also converts S-video signals to component signals when no component signals are input. Choices: ON, OFF • Select OFF not to convert any signals. • Select ON to convert composite signals to S-video and component signals, and to convert S-video signals to component signals. Notes • Converted video signals are only output to the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording you must make the same type of video connections (composite or S-video) between each component. • When converting S-video signals from a VCR to component video signals, the picture quality may suffer depending on your VCR. Component OSD CMPNT OSD Use this feature to turn on/off OSD output to the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks when using the set menu, test tone or parameter functions. Choices: ON, OFF • Select ON to output the OSD signals from COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks. • Select OFF if you do not want to output the OSD signals from COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks. Note Set menu functions even when OFF is selected. ■ Memory guard MEMORY GUARD Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other system settings. MANUAL SETUP > OPTION MENU > MEMORY GUARD > B)MEMORY GUARD [OFF ON p p / : Exit -/+ : Select Choices: ON, OFF Select ON to protect: • DSP program parameters • All SET MENU items • All speaker levels • The on-screen display (OSD) mode When MEMORY GUARD is set to ON, you cannot use the test tone or select any other SET MENU items. 56 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 57 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SET MENU ■ Parameter initialization PARAM. INI ■ Zone set ZONE SET Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each sound field program within a sound field program group. When you initialize a sound field program group, all of the parameter values within that group revert to their initial settings. MANUAL SETUP > OPTION MENU > PARAM. INI > Press the corresponding numeric button for the sound field program that you want to initialize. An asterisk (*) next to a program number means that the parameter values have been changed from their initial settings. Use to specify the location of speakers connected the SPEAKERS B terminals. MANUAL SETUP > OPTION MENU > ZONE SET > 1 2 3 *4 *5 6 7 8 9 *0 +10 Notes • You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter settings once you initialize a sound field program group. • You cannot separately initialize individual sound field programs. • You cannot initialize any program groups when MEMORY GUARD is set to ON. ■ Speaker impedance setting SP IMP.SET Use to select the impedance of your speakers. MANUAL SETUP > OPTION MENU > SP IMP.SET > / : Exit -/+ : Select p p C)PARAM. INI E)ZONE SET SP_B;;;;;;FRONT SP B Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. Choices: FRONT, ZONE B • Select FRONT to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in the main room. • Select ZONE B if the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another room. If SPEAKERS A is turned OFF and SPEAKERS B is turned ON, all the speakers including the subwoofer in the main room are muted and the unit outputs sound from SPEAKERS B only. Notes • If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack on the unit, the sound is output from both headphones and SPEAKERS B. • When a DSP program is selected, the unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode. D)SP IMP.SET Minimum 8ohms p p / : Exit -/+ : Select ADVANCED OPERATION Choices: 6ohms, 8ohms 57 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 58 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SET MENU ■ Zone 2 set ZONE2 SET (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) MANUAL SETUP > OPTION MENU > ZONE2 SET > F)ZONE2 SET OUTPUT VOL;;VAR. ZONE2 AMP;;;OFF p p / : Up/Down -/+ : Select Output volume OUTPUT VOL Use to select how the volume control will operate with regard to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks. Choices: VAR., FIX • Select VAR. to adjust the ZONE 2 volume using the remote control. • Select FIX to fix the ZONE 2 OUTPUT volume level to a standard line level. Zone 2 amplifier ZONE2 AMP Use to select how the ZONE 2 speakers will be amplified. Choices: ON, OFF • Select OFF if you do not use Zone 2 speakers or if you connect your Zone 2 speakers through an external amplifiers connected to this unit’s ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks. • Select ON to use this unit’s internal amplifier if you connect your Zone 2 speakers directly to this unit’s PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals. 58 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 59 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other A/V components made by YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control other components, you must set up remote control with the appropriate manufacturer codes. This remote control also has a learn feature which allows the remote to acquire functions from other remote controls equipped with an infrared remote control transmitter. Control area ■ Controlling this unit ■ Controlling other components The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit when the AMP mode is selected. Press AMP to select the AMP mode. The shaded areas below can be used to control other components. Each button has a different function depending on the selected components. Select the component you want to control by pressing an input selector button or SELECT k/n. The name of the selected component appears in the display window. TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD TRANSMIT DTV SELECT POWER POWER TV AV RE–NAME CLEAR LEARN SYSTEM Input selector buttons switch the component control area. POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD AMP SELECT REC AUDIO DISC SKIP + VOL POWER POWER TV AV – REC MUTE DISC SKIP POWER TV LEVEL TITLE SET MENU + AMP POWER AV AUDIO + REC MENU VOL AUDIO TV VOL A/B/C/D/E TV INPUT DISC SKIP CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TEST ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL – DISPLAY EFFECT STEREO 1 ENTERTAIN 5 MOVIE 9 HALL 2 MUSIC 6 /DTS 0 JAZZ 3 TV THTR ROCK 4 MOVIE 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES +10 ENTER CHP/INDEX LEVEL TITLE – MUTE SET MENU + MENU TV VOL TV INPUT A/B/C/D/E LEVEL CH – + + A/B/C/D/E CH ON SCREENTV MUTE STEREO CH TV VOL – – DISPLAY 1 ENTERTAINMENT 5 MOVIE THEATER 2 9 + SELECT PRESET HALL MENU TV VOL PRESET TEST RETURN SET MENU TITLE CH TV MUTE SELECT TV INPUT PRESET ADVANCED OPERATION RETURN Component control area You can control up to 11 different components by setting appropriate manufacturer codes (see page 64). EFFECT PRESET TEST ROCKON SCREEN CHURCH JAZZ CLUB CONCERT TV VOL 2 RETURN 3 – 4 DISPLAY MOVIE MUSIC TV THEATER 1 VIDEOSTEREO THEATERHALL JAZZ 6 1 7 8 2 3 /DTS SUR.ENTERTAIN SELECT MUSICEX/ESTV THTR 10 5 11 +10 0 THX 9 12 6 ROCK 4 MOVIE 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES CHP/INDEX /DTS 0 +10 ENTER CHP/INDEX y You can set the remote so that the shaded areas always control this unit. This is useful, for example, if you always want to use the numeric buttons to select this unit’s sound fields instead of for controlling the selected component (DVD, CD, MD, etc.). To activate this mode, hold down AMP for at least 3 seconds so that “A:__” (i.e., “A:DVD”) appears in the display window. To cancel, repeat so that only the selected component (i.e., “DVD”) is displayed. 59 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 60 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES If you want to change a library (component category), press j / i. You can set a different type of component. Library choices: L:DVD, L:LD, L:CD, L:CDR, L:MD, L:TAP (tape), L:TUN, L:AMP*, L:TV, L:CAB (cable), L:DBS, L:SAT, L:VCR Setting manufacturer codes You can control other components by setting the appropriate manufacturer codes. Codes can be set up for each input area. * The amplifier Library (L:AMP) code is preset to “YPC” to operate this unit. However, you can switch between the following two codes if necessary. • The initial setting for “Amplifier library” is “YPC”. The following table shows the factory preset component (Library: component category) and the manufacturer code for each area. Input area Component category (Library) Manufacturer PHONO TV – TUNER TUNER YAMAHA-1 CD CD YAMAHA-1 V-AUX VCR – CBL/SAT CABLE – MD/TAPE MD YAMAHA-1 CD-R CD-R YAMAHA YPC To operate this unit. ZONE (U.S.A., Canada and Australia models only) To operate ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 features. DTV TV – VCR 1 VCR – DVR/VCR2 VCR – 3 Press u / d to select the name of your component’s manufacturer. You will find the names of most worldwide audiovideo manufacturers in alphabetical order in the display window. + TV VOL CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET DVD DVD YAMAHA-1 CH + PRESET TV VOL – Note You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even if a YAMAHA manufacturer code is initially set as listed above. In this case, try to set other YAMAHA manufacturer code(s). 1 Press an input selector button to select the source component you want to set up. PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R 4 Press one of the buttons shaded below to see if you can control your component. If you can, the manufacturer code is correct. POWER POWER TV AV AMP REC AUDIO DISC SKIP DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 + VOL DVD – LEVEL TITLE SET MENU + MUTE MENU TV VOL 2 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “SETUP” and the selected component name appear alternately in the display window. LEARN Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning process will start. y Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Otherwise, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. 60 TV INPUT A/B/C/D/E y • If the manufacturer of your component has more than one codes, try each of them until you find the correct one. • If you continuously want to set up another code for another component, press TV MUTE/SELECT and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 61 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 5 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup mode. 2 LEARN RE–NAME CLEAR LEARN INPUT MODE MULTI CH IN TRANSMIT CD SLEEP DVD CD-R STANDBY TUNER MD/TAPE SYSTEM DVR/VCR2 POWER PHONO VCR 1 CBL/SAT AMP SELECT DTV AV POWER V-AUX TV • The supplied remote control does not contain all possible manufacturer codes for commercially available AV components (including YAMAHA AV components). If operation is not possible with any of the manufacturer codes, program the new remote control function with the Learn feature (see below) or use the remote control supplied with the component. • If you have already programmed a remote control function for a button, the function by learning programming takes priority over the setup manufacturer code’s function. • “ERROR” appears in the display window when press any buttons other than indicated in each step, or when you press more than one button at once. POWER Notes Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm apart from the other remote control on a flat surface so that their infrared transmitters are aimed at each other. 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 inches) 3 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar object. Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for more than three seconds, the remote enters the manufacturer code setting mode. Programming codes from other remote controls LEARN If you want to program functions not included in the basic operations covered by the manufacturer code, or an appropriate manufacturer code is not available, do the following. You can program any of the buttons available in the component control area (see page 59). The buttons can be programmed independently for each component. Flashes alternately y Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Otherwise, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. Note This remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some special signals or extremely long transmissions. (Refer to the operation instructions for the other remote control.) Press the button at which you want to program the new function. “LEARN” is displayed. MULTI CH IN INPUT MODE ADVANCED OPERATION CD SLEEP LEARN STANDBY DVD CD-R CLEAR TUNER MD/TAPE RE–NAME POWER DVR/VCR2 TRANSMIT PHONO VCR 1 CBL/SAT SYSTEM DTV DVD V-AUX CD-R DVR/VCR2 AMP MD/TAPE VCR 1 SELECT CBL/SAT POWER DTV POWER V-AUX + MULTI CH IN AV AUDIO CD – TUNER VOL PHONO TV Press an input selector button to select a source component. REC DISC SKIP 1 4 61 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 62 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 5 Press and hold the button you want to program on the other remote control until “OK” appears in the display window. Changing source names in the display window MULTI CH IN INPUT MODE LEARN CD SLEEP CLEAR STANDBY DVD CD-R RE–NAME TUNER MD/TAPE TRANSMIT POWER DVR/VCR2 SYSTEM PHONO VCR 1 CBL/SAT AMP SELECT DTV AV POWER V-AUX TV POWER You can change the name that appears in the display window on the remote control if you want to use the different name than the factory preset. This is useful when you have set the input selector to control a different component. 1 Notes • “NG” appears in the display window if programming was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 5. • This remote control can learn approximately 120 functions. However depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may appear in the display before you program 120 functions. In this case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room for further learning. 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 to program additional functions. 7 Press LEARN again to exit from the learning mode. 2 3 Press an input selector button to select the source component you want to rename. The selected component name appears in the display window. PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX DTV CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Press RE-NAME using a ballpoint pen or similar object. RE-NAME Press u / d to select and enter a character. Pressing d changes the character as follows: A to Z, a to z, 0 to 9, space, -(hyphen), and /(slash). (Pressing u changes the characters in reverse order.) + TV VOL LEARN CH – CH TV MUTE SELECT PRESET + PRESET TV VOL – Notes • Learning may not be possible in the following cases: – When the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other components are weak. – When the distance between the two remote controls is too great or too small. – When the remote control infrared windows are not facing at the appropriate angle. – When the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight. – When the function to be programmed is continuous or uncommon. • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press more than one button at the same time. 4 Press j / i to move the cursor to the next position. + TV VOL CH – CH + PRESET TV VOL – y If you want to continue setting up names for other components, press TV MUTE/SELECT and repeat steps 1, 3 and 4. 5 Press RE-NAME again to exit from the renaming mode. RE-NAME 62 TV MUTE SELECT PRESET 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 63 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Clearing function sets Clearing individual functions You can clear all changes made in each function set, such as learned functions, renamed source names and setup manufacturer codes. ■ Clearing a learned function 1 1 Press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. You can clear the function learned in a certain programmed button in each area. CLEAR y Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Other wise, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press CLEAR again. 2 PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Press u / d to select the clear mode. L:DVD (L: name of a component) L:AMP L:ALL RNAME FCTRY 3 Press an input selector button to select the source component containing the function you want to clear. The selected component name appears in the display window. 2 Clears all learned functions in the respective component control area. Press an input selector button to select the component. Clears all learned functions for this unit’s control area. Clears all learned functions. Clears all renamed source names. Clears all remote functions and returns the remote to the factory settings. LEARN Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3 seconds. “C:OK” appears in the display window. CLEAR Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “LEARN” and the selected component name appear alternately in the display window. y Complete each of the following steps in 30 seconds. Otherwise the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. 3 Note TRANSMIT “C:NG” appears in the display window if the operation is unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2. 4 Press CLEAR to exit from the clearing mode. Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the button reverts to the factory setting. “ERROR” appears in the display window under the following circumstances: – When a button other than the cursor is pressed. – When more than one button is pressed at once. STANDBY CLEAR LEARN SLEEP INPUT MODE PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD When you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have set manufacturer codes). CLEAR Note RE–NAME SYSTEM POWER 4 Repeat step 3 to clear other learned functions. 5 Press LEARN again to exit. 63 ADVANCED OPERATION Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or similar object, then press the button you want to clear for about 3 seconds. “C:OK” appears in the display window. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 64 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Controlling each component Once you set the appropriate manufacturer codes, you can use this remote to control your other components. Note that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. Use the input selector buttons to select the component you want to operate. The remote control automatically switches to the appropriate control mode for that component. y • To control a component without changing the receiver’s input mode, use SELECT k/n to select the component. • TV POWER, TV VOL –/+, TV INPUT, and TV MUTE will operate your TV without switching the input if the manufacturer code for your TV is set up in the DTV areas. If a component other than TV is set up in the DTV area, you can control your TV by setting up your TV in the PHONO area. If your TV is set up in both the DTV and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV area. ■ Operating a DVD player (DVD area) TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR ■ Operating a VCR or a DVD recorder (VCR 1, DVR/VCR2 and V-AUX areas) LEARN TRANSMIT SLEEP INPUT MODE POWER SYSTEM POWER RE–NAME CLEAR STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD SELECT TV POWER Pause DISC SKIP (DVD changer) Skip backward Search backward Stop TITLE TV operation POWER POWER TV AV – LEVEL SET MENU + MUTE – TV MUTE SELECT POWER TV AV Search forward + PRESET STRAIGHT Menu cursor/ SELECT DISPLAY STEREO HALL JAZZ ROCK 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES 9 /DTS 0 +10 ENTER CHP/INDEX AMP AV POWER REC AUDIO + VOL Play Search backward – LEVEL SET MENU + MUTE Stop Search forward MENU TV VOL TV INPUT A/B/C/D/E TV operation CH – CH +/– (channel) TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TEST ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL RETURN – DISPLAY STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES EFFECT THX 64 Skip forward Play MENU CH ON SCREEN – POWER DISC SKIP TV VOL RETURN Pause Record TITLE A/B/C/D/E TV INPUT TV POWER MENU TV VOL CH AV POWER + VOL TITLE SELECT AUDIO AUDIO TEST Numeric buttons AMP REC DISC SKIP PRESET RETURN LEARN SYSTEM STANDBY EFFECT DISPLAY Numeric buttons Title/index THX 9 /DTS 0 +10 ROCK ENTER CHP/INDEX ENTER 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 65 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Operating a digital TV (DTV area) or a cable/satellite TV (CBL/SAT area) ■ Operating an LD player LEARN TRANSMIT SYSTEM SYSTEM STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE CD MULTI CH IN TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR RE–NAME CLEAR POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN PHONO TUNER V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD SELECT SELECT TV POWER * POWER POWER TV AV AMP AUDIO TITLE SET MENU + POWER TV AV DISC SKIP Search backward MUTE – LEVEL TV VOL –/+ A/B/C/D/E CH +/– CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET TV operation CH + ON SCREEN CH – – TV MUTE SELECT RETURN CH + ON SCREEN – STEREO Numeric buttons HALL JAZZ 2 3 4 MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 THX 9 6 /DTS 0 DISPLAY EFFECT STEREO ROCK 1 STRAIGHT DISPLAY EFFECT ENTERTAIN Search forward Stop MENU TV VOL DISPLAY Play Skip forward MUTE PRESET TEST STRAIGHT AV POWER Sound A/B/C/D/E PRESET TV VOL RETURN + TV INPUT PRESET TEST SET MENU TV VOL TV VOL TV INPUT + VOL TITLE MENU AMP REC Skip backward – LEVEL POWER AUDIO + VOL TV operation TV MUTE TV POWER Pause REC DISC SKIP TV INPUT LEARN POWER Numeric buttons 4 MOVIE 7 8 5 EX/ES THX ENTER * AV POWER (DTV only), REC, e, p, s, and w/ f will operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR 1 if the manufacturer code for your VCR is set up in the VCR 1. ROCK 3 TV THTR +10 ENTER/12 JAZZ 2 MUSIC NIGHT CHP/INDEX HALL 1 ENTERTAIN 9 6 /DTS 0 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES +10 ENTER Chapter/time CHP/INDEX Set the manufacture code for your LD player following the setting procedure described on page 60 because DTV is factory-set to operate TVs. ADVANCED OPERATION 65 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 66 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Operating a CD player (CD area) ■ Operating a CD recorder (CD-R area) or an MD recorder (MD/TAPE area) LEARN TRANSMIT SYSTEM SYSTEM STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE CD MULTI CH IN TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR RE–NAME CLEAR POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN PHONO TUNER V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD SELECT SELECT TV POWER DISC SKIP (CD changer) POWER POWER TV AV AMP AUDIO + VOL – LEVEL TITLE SET MENU + CH – PRESET – + Numeric buttons HALL 2 3 4 MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 9 6 /DTS 0 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES +10 ENTER CHP/INDEX 66 AUDIO + VOL – LEVEL CH – AV POWER Pause REC DISC SKIP SET MENU + TV MUTE SELECT Skip forward Play Search forward MUTE MENU Stop A/B/C/D/E PRESET Numeric buttons CH + PRESET ON SCREEN STRAIGHT DISPLAY TV VOL RETURN – DISPLAY EFFECT STEREO HALL JAZZ ROCK 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 Index AMP TV VOL Clear (CD-R only) ROCK 1 ENTERTAIN THX AV TEST DISPLAY JAZZ TV TV INPUT DISPLAY STRAIGHT EFFECT STEREO Search backward TV operation TV VOL RETURN POWER TITLE CH ON SCREEN POWER Skip backward Stop PRESET TEST Search forward TV POWER Record (MD only) MENU A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE SELECT Play Skip forward MUTE TV VOL TV INPUT TV operation AV POWER Pause REC DISC SKIP Skip backward Search backward LEARN POWER THX 9 6 /DTS 0 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES +10 ENTER CHP/INDEX Index (CD-R only) 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 67 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Operating a tape deck (MD/TAPE area) TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR ■ Operating a tuner (TUNER area) TRANSMIT LEARN RE–NAME CLEAR POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD SELECT SELECT TV POWER Pause Record POWER POWER TV AV AMP AV POWER TV POWER AUDIO DISC SKIP + VOL – Search backward LEVEL TITLE SET MENU + – TV AV TV MUTE SELECT Play Direction B – LEVEL TITLE ON SCREEN MUTE Preset group A/B/C/D/E PRESET + MENU CH – A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TEST STRAIGHT ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL TV VOL – + TV INPUT PRESET – + SET MENU TV VOL Stop CH + VOL Search forward PRESET TEST DISPLAY RETURN – DISPLAY EFFECT EFFECT Numeric buttons AMP AV POWER AUDIO MUTE A/B/C/D/E PRESET RETURN POWER DISC SKIP MENU TV VOL TV INPUT CH POWER REC REC Direction A TV operation LEARN SYSTEM SYSTEM STEREO HALL JAZZ ROCK STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 THX 9 6 /DTS 0 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES +10 ENTER Preset number 1-8 5 THX Index CHP/INDEX 9 6 /DTS 0 ROCK 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES +10 ENTER CHP/INDEX Set the manufacture code for your tape deck following the setting procedure described on page 60 because MD/ TAPE is factory-set to operate MD decks. ADVANCED OPERATION 67 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 68 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY) ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY) This unit allows you to configure a multi-room audio system. The Zone 2 and Zone 3 features enable you to set this unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main room, second room (Zone 2) and third room (Zone 3). You can control this unit from the second room using the supplied remote control. Only analog signals are sent to the second and third rooms. Any source you want to listen to in the second or third room must be connected using the analog (AUDIO L/R) input jacks on this unit. Zone 2/Zone 3 connections You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-room functions of this unit: • An infrared signal receiver in the second and/or third room. • An infrared emitter in the main room. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second and/or third room to the main room (to a CD player or LD player, for example). • An amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room. y OUT IN OUT REMOTE CONTROL OUT IN This unit • Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-room installation, we recommend that you consult with the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for the Zone 2/Zone 3 connections which will best meet your requirements. • Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the REMOTE CONTROL OUT jack of this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to use an infrared emitter. Up to 6 YAMAHA components can be connected as shown. ■ System configuration and connections example Using external amplifiers To use an external amplifier in Zone 2, select OFF in ZONE2 AMP. ZONE 2 AUDIO OUT Amplifier DVD player (or other component) This unit ZONE 3 AUDIO OUT Amplifier Remote control DVD INPUT Infrared emitter Main room REMOTE CONTROL OUT Infrared signal receiver Second room Third room ZONE 2 REMOTE IN Notes • When not using the main room, turn down the volume of this unit in the main room. Adjust the ZONE 2/ZONE 3 volume by using the amplifier in the second/third room. When using the remote control to adjust the ZONE 2 volume, set the volume of the amplifier in the second room to the maximum level you will use, and select VAR. in ZONE 2 SET OUTPUT VOL (page 58). • To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. 68 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 69 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY) Using this unit’s internal amplifier To use this unit’s internal amplifier, select ON in ZONE2 AMP. R L + – PRESENCE/ ZONE 2 Second room This unit Remote controlling Zone 2/Zone 3 The supplied remote control can be used to control Zone 2/Zone 3. You can even select the input source and control components located in the main room directly from the second room regardless of the listening condition in the main room. ■ To enable Zone mode on the remote control You will be able to switch the remote control mode from one room to another, and use STANDBY, SYSTEM POWER, MUTE and VOL –/+ to control the selected room. 1 Repeat steps 1 and 2 of the procedure in “Setting manufacturer codes” on page 60. 2 Press j / i to select “L:AMP”. ■ To control Zone 2/Zone 3 1 Press SELECT k repeatedly to display “ZONE2” or “ZONE3” in the display window. or SELECT SELECT 2 Press SYSTEM POWER to turn Zone 2 or Zone 3 power on. 3 Press an input selector button to select the input source you want to listen to in the second/third room. The display window shows “2: name of selected input” if the remote control is in the Zone 2 mode. + PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX DTV CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD TV VOL – TV MUTE SELECT ADVANCED OPERATION CH PRESET CH + Note PRESET TV VOL – 3 Signals input to V-AUX and PHONO jacks cannot be sent to Zone 2/Zone 3. Press u / d to select “ZONE”. + TV VOL CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TV VOL – 4 Press LEARN to complete the Zone setup. The remote control will be able to operate this unit, Zone 2 or Zone 3. LEARN 69 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 70 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM ZONE 2/ZONE 3 (U.S.A., CANADA AND AUSTRALIA MODELS ONLY) ■ Turning this unit to either on or standby 4 You can control Zone 2 or Zone 3 by using the input selector, STANDBY, SYSTEM POWER, MUTE and VOL –/+ buttons. REC TRANSMIT RE–NAME CLEAR AUDIO LEARN DISC SKIP + * SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE VOL – PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD LEVEL TITLE SET MENU + MUTE MENU TV VOL A/B/C/D/E TV INPUT CH – TV MUTE SELECT PRESET CH + PRESET TEST ON SCREEN STRAIGHT SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY work differently depending on the selected mode that appears on the display window. • When normal, Zone2 or Zone 3 mode is selected, you can turn the main unit, Zone 2 or Zone 3 to on/standby individually. • When system mode is selected, or when YPC is selected as the amplifier library (L:AMP) code, you can turn the main unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 to on/ standby all together simultaneously. TV VOL RETURN – DISPLAY EFFECT * VOL –/+ can be used only when VAR. is selected in ZONE2 SET OUTPUT VOL (page 58). 5 Press SELECT k/n to exit from the Zone 2/ Zone 3 mode. LCD display SYSTEM POWER/ STANDBY Normal mode* name of component turns the main unit on/standby Zone 2 mode “ZONE2” or “2:name of component” turns Zone 2 to on/ standby Zone 3 mode “ZONE3” or “3:name of component” turns Zone 3 to on/ standby System mode “SYSTM” turns everything (the main unit, Zone 2, Zone 3) on/standby Note “ZONE2” or “ZONE3” will appear in the display window only when k is pressed, and SYSTM only when n is pressed. * “MAIN” appears for a few seconds when SYSTEM POWER or STANDBY is pressed. ■ Special considerations for DTS software The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. If you attempt to send the DTS signal to the second/third room you will only hear digital noise (that may damage your speakers). Thus, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made when playing DTS encoded discs. For LDs or DVDs encoded with DTS Only 2 channel analog audio signals may be sent to the second/third room. • for LDs: Set your LD player’s left and right outputs to the analog soundtrack. • for DVDs: Use the disc menu to set the DVD player’s mixed 2-channel left and right audio outputs to the PCM or Dolby Digital soundtrack. For CDs encoded in DTS To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2/ Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. 70 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 71 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS What is a sound field What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. Changing parameter settings You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. TV TRANSMIT ■ Elements of a sound field RE–NAME CLEAR AV REC LEARN AUDIO DISC SKIP SYSTEM POWER STANDBY SLEEP INPUT MODE PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD + VOL In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field: MUTE MENU TV VOL A/B/C/D/E CH TV MUTE SELECT – PRESET POWER TV 1 POWER + ON SCREEN STRAIGHT TV VOL 5 AMP CH PRESET TEST RETURN – DISPLAY STEREO HALL JAZZ 1 2 3 4 ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR MOVIE 5 6 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES +10 ENTER 4 2 EFFECT AV REC /DTS THX 9 0 ROCK 3 CHP/INDEX 1 Press AMP to select the AMP mode. 2 Turn on the video monitor and press ON SCREEN repeatedly to select the full display mode. 3 AMP ON SCREEN DISPLAY Select the sound field program you want to adjust. ON SCREEN STEREO HALL If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field processor. + TITLE SELECT Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberation taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. SET MENU TV INPUT Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms – 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only — for example, from the ceiling or a wall. Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound. Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface — walls, ceiling, the back of the room — so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. – LEVEL 1 DISPLAY 2 JAZZ ROCK 3 4 MOVIE ENTERTAIN MUSIC TV THTR 5 6 7 8 NIGHT EX/ES THX 9 /DTS 0 +10 ENTER CHP/INDEX Program No. Program name ADDITIONAL INFORMATION P05 ROCK CONCERT Cursor DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB > INIT.DLY;;;;15ms ROOM SIZE;;;;1.0 LIVENESS;;;;;;;5 REV.TIME;;;;1.6s REV.DELAY;;120ms Parameters Parameter values 71 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 72 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS 4 Press u / d to select the parameters. + TV VOL CH – CH TV MUTE SELECT PRESET + PRESET TV VOL – 5 6 Press j / i to change the parameter value. When you set a parameter to a value other than the factory preset value, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the parameter name on the video monitor. + TV VOL CH – CH TV MUTE SELECT PRESET + PRESET TV VOL – Repeat steps 3 to 5 above as necessary to change other program parameters. Notes • The available parameters may be displayed on more than one OSD page for some of the programs. To scroll through pages, press u / d. • You cannot change parameter values when MEMORY GUARD is set to “ON”. If you want to change the parameter values, set MEMORY GUARD to “OFF” (see page 56). Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cord is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the parameter values will return to the factory settings. If this happens, edit the parameter value again. ■ Resetting parameters to the factory preset values To reset a certain parameter Select the parameter you want to reset, then press –/+ repeatedly until the asterisk mark (*) next to the parameter name disappears from the video monitor. To reset all parameters Use PARAM.INI (see page 57). 72 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 73 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program. ■ DSP LEVEL Function: Description: Control range: This parameter adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on the acoustics of you listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level relative to the level of the direct sound. –6 dB – +3 dB ■ INIT. DLY/P. INT. DLY (Initial delay) Function: Description: Control range: This parameter changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value. 1 – 99 msec Source Sound Level Level Level Early Reflections Time Time Time INIT. DLY INIT. DLY INIT. DLY Sound Source Reflection Face Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms ■ ROOM SIZE/P. ROOM SIZE (Room size) Function: Description: Control range: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room. 0.1 – 2.0 Time Level Level Time Early Reflections ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Level Source Sound Time Sound Source Small value = 0.1 Large value = 2.0 73 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 74 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ LIVENESS Function: Description: Control range: This parameter adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. The LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the room. 0 – 10 Source Sound Time Small Reflected Sound Small value = 0 Level Dead Level Level Live Time Time Large Reflected Sound Large value = 10 ■ S. INIT. DLY (Surround initial delay) Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two surround channels are used. Control Range: 1 – 49 msec ■ S. ROOM SIZE (Surround room size) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. Control Range: 0.1 – 2.0 ■ S. LIVENESS (Surround liveness) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field. Control Range: 0 – 10 ■ SB INIT. DLY (Surround back initial delay) Function: This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the surround back sound field. Control Range: 1 – 49 msec ■ SB ROOM SIZE (Surround back room size) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent size of the surround back sound field. Control Range: 0.1 – 2.0 ■ SB LIVENESS (Surround back liveness) Function: This parameter adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the surround back sound field. Control Range: 0 – 10 74 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 75 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ REV.TIME (Reverberation time) Function: This parameter adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB (at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. Description: Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments. Control Range: 1.0 – 5.0 sec Source Sound Reverberation Reverberation Early Reflections 60 dB 60 dB REV.TIME Sound Source REV.TIME 60 dB REV.TIME Long Reverberation Short Reverberation Large value = 5.0 s Small value = 1.0 s ■ REV.DELAY (Reverberation delay) This parameter adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. Description: The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment. Control Range: 0 – 250 msec Level Function: Source Sound (dB) 60 dB Reverberation Time REV.DELAY REV.TIME ■ REV. LEVEL (Reverberation level) ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Function: This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. Description: The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. Control Range: 0 – 100% Level Source Sound REV. LEVEL Time 75 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 76 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ DIALG.LIFT (Dialog lift) Function: Description: Choices: This parameter adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds by assigning some of the front and center channel elements to the presence speakers. The larger the parameter, the higher the position of the front and center channel sound. 0/1/2/3/4/5, initial setting is 3. For 7ch Stereo Function: These parameter adjusts the volume level for each channel in 7-channel stereo mode. Control Range: 0 – 100% ■ CT LEVEL (Center level) ■ SL LEVEL (Surround left level) ■ SR LEVEL (Surround right level) ■ SB LEVEL (Surround back level) ■ PR LEVEL (Presence level) For PRO LOGIC IIx Music and PRO LOGIC II Music ■ PANORAMA Function: Choices: Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for wraparound effect. OFF/ON, initial setting is OFF. ■ DIMENSION Function: Control range: Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear. –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard). ■ CT WIDTH (Center width) Function: Control range: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. A larger value adjusts the center image towards the front left and right speakers. 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from front left and right speakers), initial setting is 3. For PRO LOGIC IIx Music, Movie and Game ■ PLII/PLIIx (Pro Logic II/Pro Logic IIx) Function: Choices: Switches the type of Pro Logic decoding to be used. PLII decoding creates 5.1-channel sound from 2channel sources. PLIIx decoding creates 6.1/7.1-channel sound from 2-channel sources. PLII, PLIIx For DTS Neo:6 Music ■ C. IMAGE (Center image) Function: Control range: This parameter adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. 0 – 0.5 For THX Cinema ■ DEC (2ch Decoder Select) Function: Choices: 76 Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using THX Cinema. PRO LOGIC / PLII Movie / Neo:6 Cinema 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 77 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, or enters in the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. On screen display does not appear. No sound Remedy Refer to page The power cord is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Connect the power cord firmly. — The impedance setting is incorrect. Set the impedance to match your speakers. 23 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity). Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cord, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then use it normally. — The setting for the on-screen display is set to “DISPLAY OFF”. Select the full display or short display mode. 44 GRAY BACK in the SET MENU is set to OFF, and no video signal is currently being received. Set GRAY BACK to AUTO to always show the OSD. 56 Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. INPUT MODE is set to DTS or ANALOG. Select AUTO. 34 No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT, MULTI CH INPUT or the input selector buttons. 30 Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 12 The front speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the front speakers with SPEAKERS A and/or B. 30 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. 31 If you are playing an LD source, the player may not output digital signals if the LD source was not digitally recorded. Set the INPUT MODE to ANALOG. 34 The INPUT MODE is set to ANALOG while playing a source encoded with a DTS signal. Set the INPUT MODE to AUTO or DTS. 34 The signals this unit cannot reproduce are being received from a source component e.g.: a CD-ROM. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. — The output and input for the picture are connected to different types of video jacks. Turn on the video conversion function. 56 12—14 16—19 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION No picture Cause 77 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 78 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM TROUBLESHOOTING Problem The sound suddenly goes off. Cause Remedy Refer to page Check that the impedance selector setting is correct. 23 Check that the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power, and play the source again. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE to cancel a mute. 31 Only the speaker on one side can be heard. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 12 Incorrect balance settings in SET MENU. Adjust the SP LEVEL settings. 50 Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, and the front and surround speakers output effect sounds. No sound from the effect speakers. The sound field programs are turned off. Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to turn them on. 34 A Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS decoding DSP program is being used with material not encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS. Try another sound field program. 32 The output level of the center speaker is set to minimum. Raise the level of the center speaker. 50 “CENTER SP” in the SET MENU is set to NONE. Select the appropriate mode for your center speaker. 49 One of the Hi-Fi DSP programs (except for 7ch Stereo) has been selected. Try another sound field program. 32 The output level of the surround speakers is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the surround speakers. 50 “SURR. LR SP” in the SET MENU is set to NONE. Select the appropriate speaker mode for the surround L/R speakers. 49 A monaural source is being played with STRAIGHT. Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to turn on the sound fields. Then try another sound field program. — Presence speakers are selected. Select surround back speakers in PR/SBch SELECT. 53 “SURR. LR SP” in the SET MENU is set to NONE. If the speaker mode for the surround L/R speakers is set to NONE, the speaker mode for the surround back speaker is automatically set to NONE. Select the appropriate speaker mode for the surround L/R speaker mode. 49 “SURR B L/R SP” in the SET MENU is set to NONE. Select LRG or SML. 49 “LFE/BASS OUT” in the SET MENU is set to FRONT when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Select SWFR or BOTH. 50 “LFE/BASS OUT” in the SET MENU is set to SWFR or FRONT when a 2-channel source is being played. Select BOTH. 50 No sound from the center speaker. No sound from the surround speakers. No sound from the surround back speakers. No sound from the subwoofer. The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. The source does not contain low bass signals. 78 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 79 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy Refer to page Dolby Digital or DTS sources cannot be played. (Dolby Digital or DTS indicator on the front panel display does not light up.) The connected component is not set to output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals. Make an appropriate setting following the operations instructions for your component. — INPUT MODE is set to ANALOG. Set INPUT MODE to AUTO or DTS. 34 A “humming” sound can be heard. Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — No connection from the turntable to the GND terminal. Connect the grounding cord of your turnable to the GND terminal of this unit. 19 The volume level is low while playing a record. The record is being played on a turntable with an MC cartridge. The turntable should be connected to this unit through an MC-head amplifier. 19 The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power to the component. — The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect with a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to this DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. The source component is not connected to this unit’s DIGITAL INPUT jacks. A source cannot be recorded by an analog component connected to the AUDIO OUT jacks. Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks. 16—19 The source component is not connected to this unit’s analog AUDIO IN jacks. Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO IN jacks. 16—19 The sound field parameters and some other settings on this unit cannot be changed. “MEMORY GUARD” in the SET MENU is set to ON. Select OFF. 56 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power cord from the outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — “CHECK SP WIRES” appears on the front panel display. Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 12 Some components cannot record the Dolby Digital or DTS sources. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 79 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 80 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM TROUBLESHOOTING Remedy Refer to page Problem Cause There is noise interference from digital or highfrequency equipment, or this unit. This unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. — The picture is disturbed. The video source uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent dubbing. Playing back video software that has an anti-copy signal or video signals with a lot of noise may produce unstable images. — There is noise when the OSD is displayed. The OSD may be disturbed when displaying OSD through component video connections. Select OFF in CMPNT OSD. 56 This unit suddenly turns into the standby mode. The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait until this unit cools down and then turn it back on. — ■ Tuner Problem FM stereo reception is noisy. FM AM 80 Cause The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Remedy Refer to page Check the antenna connections. Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. 21 Use the manual tuning method. 36 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multipath interference. — The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The station is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. 21 Use the manual tuning method. 36 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned in. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Preset the stations again. 37 The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for best reception. — Use the manual tuning method. 36 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. — There are buzzing and whining noises (especially in the evening). A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV. — 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 81 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work nor function properly. The remote control does not “learn” new functions. Cause Remedy Refer to page Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 feet) and no more than 30 degrees off-axis from the front panel. 7 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 3 The manufacture code has not correctly set. Set the manufacturer code correctly. 60 Try to set the other codes of the same manufacturer. 60 Even if the manufacturer code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. Program the necessary functions independently into the programmable buttons using the Learn feature. 61 The batteries of this remote control and/or the other remote control are too weak. Replace the batteries. 3 The distance between the two remote controls is too much or too little. Place the remote controls at the proper distance. 61 The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not compatible with this remote control. Learning is not possible. — Memory capacity is full. Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for the new functions. 63 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 81 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 82 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM GLOSSARY GLOSSARY ■ Dolby Surround ■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete 7.1-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There is a Music mode for music, a Movie mode for movies and a Game mode for games. ■ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (left, center, and right), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency effect), the system has a total of 5.1 channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (from maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with previously unheard of excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes with "flyover" and "fly-around" effects. ■ Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround software. This new technology enables a discrete 5channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels (instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology). The Music and Game modes are also available for 2-channel sources in addition to the movie mode. 82 ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, a left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1 channels). The unit incorporates DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to existing 5.1-channel format. ■ Neo:6 Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6 channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available; “Music mode” for playing music sources and “Cinema mode” for movies. ■ LFE 0.1 channel This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in a Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1 channel systems. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 83 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM GLOSSARY ■ THX Cinema processing ■ THX Select THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by the world-renowned film production company, Lucasfilm Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas’ personal desire to make your experience of the film soundtrack, in both movie theatres and in your home theatre, as faithful as possible to what the director intended. Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theatres called dubbing stages and are designed to be played back in movie theatres with similar equipment and conditions. This same soundtrack is then transferred directly onto Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not changed for playback in a small home theatre environment. THX engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate the sound from the movie theatre environment into the home, correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur. On this product, when the THX indicator is on, THX features are automatically added in Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX). Before any home theatre component can be THX Select certified, it must incorporate all the features above and also pass a rigorous series of quality and performance tests. Only then can a product feature the THX Select logo, which is your guarantee that the Home Theatre products you purchase will give you superb performance for many years to come. THX Select requirements cover every aspect of the product including power amplifier and pre-amplifier performance and operation, and hundreds of other parameters in both the digital and analog domain. ■ Re-Equalization The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and harsh when played back over audio equipment in the home because film soundtracks were designed to be played back in large movie theatres using very different professional equipment. Re-Equalization restores the correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in a small home environment. ■ Timbre Matching The human ear changes our perception of a sound depending on the direction from which the sound is coming. In a movie theatre, there is an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is all around you. In a home theatre, you use only two speakers located to the side of your head. The Timbre Matching feature filters the information going to the surround speakers so that they more closely match the tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front speakers. This ensures seamless panning between the front and surround speakers. ■ Adaptive Decorrelation THX Surround EX - Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint development of Dolby Laboratories and the THX Ltd. In a movie theater, film soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology are able to reproduce an extra channel which has been added during the mixing of the program. This channel, called Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in addition to the currently available front left, front center, front right, surround right, surround left and subwoofer channels. This additional channel provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound localization than ever before. Movies that were created using the Dolby Digital Surround EX technology, when released into the home consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the packaging. A list of movies created using this technology can be found on the Dolby web site at www.dolby.com. A list of available DVD software titles encoded with this technology can be found at www.thx.com. Only receiver and controller products bearing the THX Surround EX logo, when in the THX Surround EX mode, faithfully reproduce this new technology in the home. This product may also engage the THX Surround EX mode during the playback of 5.1 channel material that is not Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded. In such case the information delivered to the Surround Back channel will be program dependent and may or may not be very pleasing depending on the particular soundtrack and the tastes of the individual listener. ■ CINEMA DSP Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard as well. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and audio experience of movie theater in the listening room of your own home. 83 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION In a movie theatre, a large number of surround speakers help create an enveloping surround sound experience, but in a home theatre there are usually only two speakers. This can make the surround speakers sound like headphones that lack spaciousness and envelopment. The surround sounds will also collapse into the closest speaker as you move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive Decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel's time and phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel. This expands the listening position and creates--with only two speakers--the same spacious surround experience as in a movie theatre. ■ THX Surround EX 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 84 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM GLOSSARY ■ SILENT CINEMA ■ S VIDEO signal YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. With the S VIDEO signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S VIDEO cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. ■ ITU-R ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU (International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R recommends a standard speaker placement which is used in many critical listening rooms, especially for mastering purposes. ■ Composite Video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic elements of a video picture; color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. 84 ■ Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to use the component signal for output. 00_HTR-5790U_EN.book Page 85 Tuesday, December 9, 2003 9:16 AM SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS AUDIO SECTION VIDEO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround, Surround back 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω ..................................... 110 W • Video Signal Type [U.S.A., Canada and Korea models] ................................... NTSC [Other models] ............................................................ PAL/NTSC • Maximum Power (EIAJ) [China, Asia, Korea and General models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω .......................................................... 165 W • Signal to Noise Ratio .............................................................. 50 dB • Dynamic Power (IHF) [U.S.A., Canada, China, Australia, Asia, Korea and General models] 8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 145/185/240/320 W • DIN Standard Output Power [U.K. and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω .........................................................170 W • IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω ....................................................... 125 W • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Composite, S-Video ................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB Component ............................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB FM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Asia and General model] ......... 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • Usable Sensitivity (IHF)........................................ 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf) • Damping Factor (IHF) 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω................................................... 140 or more • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB • Frequency Response CD terminal to Front L/R ...................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.2%/0.3% • Total Harmonic Distortion PHONO to REC OUT (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) .................. 0.02% CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 60 W, 8 Ω) .......... 0.04% • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 42 dB • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R [U.K., Europe and Australia models] .................................... 81 dB [Other models] ....................................................................... 86 dB CD (250 mV) to Front L/R, Effect Off ................................ 100 dB AM SECTION • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less • Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) PHONO (terminated) to Front L/R ........................... 60 dB/55 dB CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Front L/R ....................... 60 dB/45 dB • Tone Control (Front L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ....................................................... ±6 dB/50 Hz BASS Turnover Frequency .................................................. 350 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................ ±6 dB/20 kHz TREBLE Turnover Frequency............................................ 3.5 kHz • Phones Output .......................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance PHONO .................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 kΩ CD, etc .................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz [Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models] ................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120 V/60 Hz [Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V/50 Hz [China model] ..................................................... AC 220 V/50 Hz [Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V/60 Hz [U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V/50 Hz [Asia and General models] AC 110/120/220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 500 W/630 VA [Other models] ................................................................... 500 W • Standby Power Consumption ................................................................................... 0.5 W or less • AC Outlets [U.S.A. and Canada models]..... 2 (Total 100 W/0.8 A maximum) [U.K. and Australia models] .............. 1 (Total 100 W maximum) [China and Europe models] ................ 2 (Total 100 W maximum) [Asia and General models] ................... 2 (Total 50 W maximum) • Dimension (W x H x D) ................................... 435 x 171 x 421 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 16-7/8”) • Weight ........................................................................ 15 kg (33 lbs) 85 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • Output Level/Output Impedance REC OUT ............................................................. 200 mV/1.2 kΩ PRE OUT ................................................................... 1.0 V/500 Ω SUBWOOFER ........................................................... 2.0 V/500 Ω ZONE 2 OUTPUT [U.S.A., Canada and Australia models].................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ ZONE 3 OUTPUT [U.S.A., Canada and Australia models]............. 200 mV/1.2 kΩ • Frequency Response ........................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz +0.5, –2 dB HTR-5790U-cv.fm Page 1 Tuesday, November 18, 2003 11:12 AM U HTR-5790 AV Receiver ©2003 YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, F.R. OF GERMANY ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. Printed in Malaysia WC85700 OWNER'S MANUAL